WO2023207204A1 - Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device - Google Patents

Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023207204A1
WO2023207204A1 PCT/CN2022/144201 CN2022144201W WO2023207204A1 WO 2023207204 A1 WO2023207204 A1 WO 2023207204A1 CN 2022144201 W CN2022144201 W CN 2022144201W WO 2023207204 A1 WO2023207204 A1 WO 2023207204A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
zoom lens
lens
lens group
wide
zoom
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/144201
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
未来
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210441771.9A external-priority patent/CN116990946A/en
Priority claimed from CN202210439560.1A external-priority patent/CN116990945A/en
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Publication of WO2023207204A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023207204A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B15/00Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification
    • G02B15/14Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective
    • G02B15/16Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group
    • G02B15/163Optical objectives with means for varying the magnification by axial movement of one or more lenses or groups of lenses relative to the image plane for continuously varying the equivalent focal length of the objective with interdependent non-linearly related movements between one lens or lens group, and another lens or lens group having a first movable lens or lens group and a second movable lens or lens group, both in front of a fixed lens or lens group

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of optical imaging technology, specifically to a zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment.
  • This application provides a zoom lens, a camera module and an electronic device.
  • the zoom lens can improve imaging quality when applied to electronic devices.
  • the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has negative refractive power, and the The second lens group has positive refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the position between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has positive optical power, and the third lens group has positive optical power.
  • the two lens groups have negative refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the distance between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • the present application also provides a camera module, which includes a photosensitive element and a zoom lens, and the zoom lens can move relative to the photosensitive element along the optical axis direction.
  • the application further provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes a device body and a camera module.
  • the device body has an opening.
  • the camera module is disposed in the device body corresponding to the opening.
  • the zoom lens of the camera module can at least partially extend or retract the device body through the opening.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device in a state according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 in another state.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 from another perspective.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a camera module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a lens with a critical point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 9 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 10 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 11 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 12 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 13 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 16 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 17 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 18 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 19 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 20 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 21 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 24 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 25 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 26 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 27 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 28 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 29 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Figure 32 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 4 is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 33 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 34 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 35 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 36 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 37 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Figure 40 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 5 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 41 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 42 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 43 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 44 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 45 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Figure 48 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 49 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 50 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 6 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 51 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 52 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 53 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device in a state according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 54 in another state.
  • FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 55 from another perspective.
  • Figure 57 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of a zoom lens including a third lens group provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 60 is a schematic diagram of a lens with a critical point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of a zoom lens including a first bearing member and a second bearing member according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 62 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 63 is an axial chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 64 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 65 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 66 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 67 is a distortion curve when the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 68 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Figure 70 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 71 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 72 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 73 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 74 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 75 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application in a retracted state.
  • FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Figure 78 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 79 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 80 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • Figure 81 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 82 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • Figure 83 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has negative refractive power, and the second lens group It has positive optical power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group are movable along the optical axis direction to adjust the zoom lens at the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • At least one lens in the zoom lens has a critical point number greater than or equal to 2; the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 2.5 ⁇ TTLw/ImgH ⁇ 4; where, TTLw is the zoom lens The total optical length at the wide-angle end, ImgH is the image height.
  • the zoom lens also has a retracted state.
  • the relationship is satisfied: cTTL ⁇ TTLw and cTTL ⁇ TTLt, where cTTL is the optical power of the zoom lens when it is in the retracted state.
  • the total length, TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the shrinkage state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ cTTL/ImgH ⁇ 2.
  • the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the telephoto end, the first lens group and the second lens group move toward the object side along the optical axis.
  • the first lens group moves toward the image side along the optical axis
  • the second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis
  • the zoom lens further includes an aperture, and the aperture is arranged on the object side of the second lens group or inside the second lens group. During the zooming process of the zoom lens, the aperture and The second lens group moves synchronously.
  • the zoom lens further includes a third lens group with negative refractive power, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
  • the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 2-3; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 3-5.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relational expression: 1 ⁇ fw/ImgH ⁇ 1.7, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -3 ⁇ f1/f2 ⁇ -1.2, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.05 ⁇ d/TTLw ⁇ 0.25, where ⁇ d is the movement of the second lens group during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. distance.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5 ⁇ tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end. half-picture angle.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship ft/ENPt ⁇ 3, where ft is the focal length of the telephoto end, and ENPt is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end.
  • the most object-side lens of the first lens group has negative refractive power
  • the most object-side lens of the second lens group has positive refractive power
  • the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5 ⁇ N ⁇ 10.
  • the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has positive optical power, and the second lens group has Negative refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the position between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • At least one lens in the zoom lens has a critical point number greater than or equal to 2; the telephoto end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.8 ⁇ TTLt/ImgH ⁇ 3.6; where, TTLt is the zoom The total optical length of the lens when it is at the telephoto end, and ImgH is the image height.
  • the zoom lens also has a retracted state.
  • the relationship is satisfied: cTTL ⁇ TTLw and cTTL ⁇ TTLt, where cTTL is the optical power of the zoom lens when it is in the retracted state.
  • the total length, TTLw is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the shrinkage state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ cTTL/ImgH ⁇ 2.
  • the zoom lens when the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
  • the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis
  • the second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis
  • the zoom lens further includes an aperture, and the aperture is disposed on the object side of the first lens group or inside the first lens group or on the image side of the first lens group.
  • the diaphragm moves along with the first lens group.
  • the zoom lens further includes a third lens group, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
  • the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 3-5; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 2-4.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relational expression: 1 ⁇ fw/ImgH ⁇ 1.7, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -1 ⁇ f1/f2 ⁇ -0.5, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.15 ⁇ d/TTLt ⁇ 0.5, where ⁇ d is the movement of the first lens group during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. distance.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5 ⁇ tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end. half-picture angle.
  • the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: fw/ENPw ⁇ 2.4, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end, and ENPw is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end.
  • the lens on the most image side of the first lens group has positive refractive power.
  • the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5 ⁇ N ⁇ 10.
  • the camera module includes a photosensitive element and a zoom lens.
  • the zoom lens can move relative to the photosensitive element along the optical axis direction.
  • the electronic device includes a device body and a camera module.
  • the device body has an opening.
  • the camera module is arranged in the device body corresponding to the opening.
  • the camera module The zoom lens can be extended or retracted from the device body at least partially through the opening.
  • the following is divided into the first part and the second part to introduce the two different zoom lenses, camera modules and electronic equipment provided by this application.
  • the first part comes from the prior application with application number 202210441771.9
  • the second part comes from the prior application with application number 202210439560.1.
  • the electronic device 100 includes a device body 1 and a camera module 2 .
  • the device body 1 has an opening K14, and the camera module 2 is arranged in the device body 1 corresponding to the opening K14.
  • the zoom lens 21 of the camera module 2 can at least partially extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14.
  • the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to extend from the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in FIG. 2 ).
  • the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to retract into the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in FIG. 1 ).
  • the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a wearable device (such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.), a television, an e-reader and other devices.
  • a wearable device such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.
  • a television an e-reader and other devices.
  • the device body 1 refers to the main part of the electronic device 100.
  • the main part includes electronic components that realize the main functions of the electronic device 100 and a housing that protects and carries these electronic components.
  • the device body 1 may include a display screen 11, a middle frame 12, and a back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 3).
  • the display screen 11 and the back cover 13 are both connected to the middle frame 12, and are arranged on opposite sides of the middle frame 12. And the sides of the middle frame 12 are exposed outside the back cover 13 and the display screen 11 .
  • the camera module 2 can be disposed on any side of the electronic device 100, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 2 can be installed on the front, back, or side of the mobile phone.
  • the so-called front refers to the side of the mobile phone with the display screen 11;
  • the so-called back refers to the side of the mobile phone with the back cover 13;
  • the so-called side refers to the circumferential side of the middle frame 12 of the mobile phone. It can be understood that, depending on the type of electronic device 100, the definitions of the front, back, side, etc. may be different, and other types of electronic devices 100 will not be described in detail here.
  • the opening K14 may be opened on the back cover 13 .
  • the opening K14 may also be provided on the display screen 11 ; or, the opening K14 may be provided on the middle frame 12 .
  • the camera module 2 is a rear camera.
  • the opening K14 is provided on the display screen 11, the camera module is a front camera.
  • the length of the camera module will also be limited due to the thickness limitation of the electronic device.
  • the thickness of the camera module is limited, since the distance between the photosensitive element and the lens is not adjustable, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element in the camera module will be limited. If the camera module is designed to be thicker and the electronic device is thinner, it may cause the camera module to form a thicker bulge on the back cover of the electronic device. Therefore, when the camera module in the related art is applied to an electronic device, it is impossible to achieve the compatibility of thinning and lightness of the electronic device and high imaging quality of the camera module.
  • the zoom lens 21 can extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14, the camera module 2 can have a larger focal length without affecting the electronic device.
  • the thickness of the electronic device 100 is 100, thereby solving the problem of incompatibility between the thinness and lightness of the electronic device 100 and the high imaging quality of the camera module 2 .
  • the camera module 2 includes a filter 22, a photosensitive element 23 and a zoom lens 21 described in any of the following embodiments.
  • the zoom lens 21, the filter 22, and the photosensitive element 23 are arranged in sequence along the optical axis X direction.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 of the zoom lens 21 can move relative to the photosensitive element 23 along the optical axis X direction.
  • the zoom lens 21 is used to collect light from the photographed scene and focus the light on the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the filter 22 is used to eliminate unnecessary light to improve effective resolution and color reproduction.
  • the filter 22 may be, but is not limited to, an infrared filter 22 .
  • the photosensitive element 23 (Sensor) is also called a photosensitive chip or an image sensor, and is used to receive light passing through the filter 22 and convert the optical signal into an electrical signal.
  • the photosensitive element 23 may be a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) or a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS).
  • the photosensitive element 23 has an imaging surface S231, and the imaging surface S231 is a target surface on the photosensitive element 23 that receives light.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes a photosensitive element 23 having an imaging surface S231 and a filter 22 .
  • the zoom lens 21 in the above-mentioned camera module 2 will be introduced in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the object side and the image side respectively refer to: with the zoom lens 21 as the boundary, the side where the photographed object is located is the object side, and the side where the image formed by the photographed object is located is the image side. Therefore, when shooting, light first passes through the first lens group G1 closer to the object side, and then passes through the second lens group G2 closer to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 has negative optical power
  • the second lens group G2 has positive optical power
  • the optical power represents the ability of the optical system (lens or lens group) to deflect light.
  • optical power is also the reciprocal of the image-side focal length.
  • the optical power of an optical system is positive, which means it has a converging effect on light.
  • the power of an optical system is negative, which means it diffuses light.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are both used to achieve zooming through movement, so they can both be called zoom lens groups.
  • Either one of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. That is to say, the first lens group G1 is a compensation lens group, or the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group.
  • the so-called compensation lens group refers to a lens group used to compensate the position of the image plane so that the focus of objects photographed at different distances falls on the imaging plane S231.
  • the object-side lens of the first lens group G1 has negative refractive power, so that the zoom lens 21 can provide better imaging effects.
  • the object-side lens of the second lens group G2 has positive refractive power, so that the zoom lens 21 can provide better imaging effects.
  • the most object-side lens of the first lens group G1 refers to the lens in the first lens group G1 that is closest to the object side.
  • the most object-side lens of the second lens group G2 refers to the lens closest to the object side in the second lens group G2.
  • the zoom lens 21 has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction to zoom switch between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • the telephoto end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is maximum, and the telephoto end can also be called the telephoto state.
  • the wide-angle end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is the smallest, and the wide-angle end can also be called the wide-angle state.
  • the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end are different from the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end. Therefore, the telephoto end and the wide-angle end are two different shooting states of the zoom lens 21 , where the telephoto end is used for telephoto shooting and the wide-angle end is used for wide-angle shooting.
  • mobile phones are equipped with at least three lenses, including a telephoto lens, a main camera lens, and an ultra-wide-angle lens.
  • the telephoto lens is used for telephoto shooting
  • the main camera and ultra-wide-angle lens are both used for wide-angle shooting
  • the field of view of the main camera is smaller than that of the ultra-wide-angle lens.
  • this design will first make the entire camera module larger and increase the product cost.
  • each lens can only be equipped with a small sensor element, thus affecting the imaging. quality.
  • zoom lens 21 since both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction, this can be achieved by moving the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the zoom lens 21 zooms and switches between a telephoto end and a wide-angle end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment is equivalent to integrating the telephoto lens and the main camera lens, thereby reducing the module volume and cost, and can be matched with the outsole photosensitive element 23 (such as Using a 1/1.28-inch photosensitive element 23), it can achieve 50-megapixel imaging from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, thereby improving imaging quality (such as achieving high-pixel shooting and reducing the signal-to-noise ratio).
  • the wide-angle end of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 2.5 ⁇ TTLw/ImgH ⁇ 4.
  • TTLw is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the wide-angle end
  • ImgH is the image height
  • the image height refers to half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface S231.
  • the total optical length refers to the distance from the surface of the first lens group G1 closest to the object side to the imaging surface S231. Please refer to here for the following description of the total optical length.
  • the TTLw/ImgH may be, but is not limited to, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, etc.
  • TTLw is 20mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 23.378mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 23.5mm and ImgH is 6.450mm.
  • the zoom lens 21 can not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance. It can be understood that the miniaturized zoom lens 21 is more suitable for electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones.
  • zoomable camera modules have been applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones that have thinning and lightness requirements.
  • the zoom function requires the lens in the camera module to move relative to the photosensitive element, the total length of the camera module must be longer, which is generally greater than the thickness of the electronic device.
  • periscope cameras are usually used, and the length direction of the periscope camera is arranged in accordance with the width direction (or length direction) of the electronic device, that is, the length direction of the periscope camera is in line with the length direction of the electronic device.
  • the thickness direction is set vertically.
  • the periscope camera is provided with a prism, which is used to receive and reflect external light so that the reflected light propagates along the length of the periscope camera.
  • periscope cameras are suitable for telephoto shooting, but not for wide-angle shooting, because wide-angle shooting requires the camera to have a large field of view.
  • the thickness of the prism will also increase, which cannot satisfy electronic equipment. thickness of.
  • specifications such as aperture and peripheral brightness are also limited by the thickness of the prism.
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is applied to the electronic device 100, the zoom lens 21 can be extended or retracted through the opening K14 on the device body 1, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are opposite to the photosensitive element 23 movement to achieve zoom.
  • This structural form does not involve prisms, so the technical problems caused by the above-mentioned prisms will not arise. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by this application can improve imaging quality.
  • the zoom lens 21 also has a retracted state.
  • the relationship expressions are satisfied: cTTL ⁇ TTLw and cTTL ⁇ TTLt.
  • cTTL is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state
  • TTLt is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end.
  • the total optical length cTTL when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state is the shortest, which is smaller than the total optical length corresponding to the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Therefore, cTTL is the minimum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the user can control the zoom lens 21 to extend to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end.
  • the user can control the zoom lens 21 to shorten to switch to the contracted state.
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is extended to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, it extends out of the electronic device 100 through the opening K14; when the zoom lens 21 is shortened to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, In the retracted state, the zoom lens 21 is retracted into the electronic device 100 .
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies: cTTL ⁇ TTLt ⁇ TTLw. That is to say, the total optical length TTLw when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end is greater than the total optical length TTLt when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end, so TTLw is the maximum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the contraction state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ cTTL/ImgH ⁇ 2.
  • cTTL is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is in the contracted state
  • ImgH is the image height.
  • cTTL/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.24, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.55, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, etc.
  • cTTL is 10.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 9.97mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 9.98mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can be applied to applications with Electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones. This allows the zoom lens 21 to not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance.
  • both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are located in the device body 1 .
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 is at least partially located outside the device body 1, and the second lens group G2 is at least partially located outside the device body.
  • the zoom lens further includes an aperture 211 , which is disposed on the object side of the second lens group G2 or inside the second lens group G2 . That is to say, the diaphragm 211 may be disposed outside the second lens group G2, or may be disposed between two adjacent lenses in the second lens group G2.
  • the diaphragm 211 and the second lens group G2 move synchronously. That is to say, the aperture 211 and the second lens group G2 are relatively fixed.
  • the so-called relative fixation means that the aperture 211 and the second lens group G2 move together.
  • the diaphragm 211 can be fixed on the second lens group G2 or can be fixed on other components, which is not limited here.
  • the arrangement of the lenses in the second lens group G2 is relatively sparse, while the arrangement of the lenses in the first lens group G1 is relatively dense, it is possible to arrange the diaphragm 211 and the second lens group G2 together.
  • the space is rationally utilized, and the radial size of each lens in the second lens group G2 is smaller, so the diaphragm 211 is more easily disposed together with the second lens group G2.
  • the zoom lens 21 also includes a third lens group G3 with negative refractive power.
  • the third lens group G3 is fixedly disposed on the image of the second lens group G2. side.
  • the third lens group G3 is used to correct the chief ray incident angle (Chief Ray Angle, CRA) at the wide-angle end and telephoto end.
  • CRA is a parameter of the Sensor, and the light needs to be incident on the Sensor at the required angle.
  • the zoom lens 21 the CRA at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end needs to be consistent. Therefore, the arrangement of the third lens group G3 can ensure that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging quality.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 2-3, that is, 2 or 3.
  • the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 3-5, that is, 3, 4, or 5 lenses.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes the third lens group G3, the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2, that is, 1 or 2.
  • each lens in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 can be a glass lens or a plastic lens.
  • Each lens can have positive or negative power.
  • the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side
  • the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side.
  • the object side of each lens in the above three lens groups can be spherical, aspheric, etc., and similarly, the image side of each lens can be spherical, aspheric, etc.
  • the number of critical points Q of at least one lens in the zoom lens 21 is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes at least one lens with two critical points Q or above.
  • the critical point Q refers to the tangent point on the lens surface that is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis X, in addition to the intersection point with the optical axis X.
  • the shape change of the lens in the radial direction will be relatively gentle, which can prevent the lens from being too thick and reduce the space occupied by the lens in the direction from the object side to the image side. space, so that the zoom lens 21 can be miniaturized, which is more conducive to application in electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes a first bearing member 212 and a second bearing member 213 .
  • the first bearing member 212 can be sleeved on the outer periphery of the second bearing member 213 . Both the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 can move relatively along the optical axis X direction.
  • the first lens group G1 is fixed in the first carrier 212 .
  • the first carrying member 212 is used to drive the first lens group G1 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the second lens group G2 is fixed in the second bearing member 213 .
  • the second bearing member 213 is used to drive the second lens group G2 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the first bearing member 212 may be disposed in the opening K14 of the electronic device 100, and the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 may extend or retract the electronic device 100 through the opening K14.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be carried in other ways.
  • the structure shown in FIG. 4 is only an illustration and should not be regarded as a limitation of the present application.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ fw/ImgH ⁇ 1.7, where fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
  • fw/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.32, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, etc.
  • fw is 7mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.6mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
  • the ratio of the wide-angle end focal length fw to the image height ImgH is set to be greater than 1 and less than 1.7, thereby ensuring that the wide-angle end focal length is within the common focal length range of the main camera of a mobile phone.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: -3 ⁇ f1/f2 ⁇ -1.2, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
  • f1/f2 can be but is not limited to -2.9, -2.8, -2.7, -2.6, -2.5, -2.4, -2.3, -2.2, -2.1, -2, -1.9, -1.8, -1.7, -1.6, -1.5, -1.4, -1.3, etc.
  • f1 is -17.615mm and f2 is 8.495mm; or f1 is -13.251mm and f2 is 7.026mm; or f1 is -18.621mm and f2 is 8.523mm.
  • the ratio of the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 to the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 is set to be greater than -3 and less than -1.2, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be reasonably allocated
  • the optical power relationship enables better focusing and zooming.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 0.05 ⁇ d/TTLw ⁇ 0.25, where ⁇ d is the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. The distance moved by the second lens group G2.
  • ⁇ d/TTLw can be, but is not limited to, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.1, 0.11, 0.12, 0.13, 0.14, 0.15, 0.16, 0.17, 0.18, 0.19, 0.2, 0.21, 0.22, 0.23, 0.24, etc.
  • ⁇ d is 1.705mm and TTLw is 20mm; or ⁇ d is 1.787mm and TTLw is 23.378mm; or ⁇ d is 1.831mm and TTLw is 23.5mm.
  • the ratio of the moving distance of the second lens group G2 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end and the maximum total optical length TTLw of the zoom lens 21 is reasonably set between 0.05 and 0.25, so that a smaller lens can be used.
  • the change amount of the group interval achieves a larger zoom ratio, which is beneficial to compressing the total length of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.5 ⁇ tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is the zoom lens 21 Half-frame angle at telephoto end.
  • the half picture angle refers to half of the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV).
  • tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt) may be, but is not limited to, 1.6, 1.71, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.25, etc.
  • hFOVw is 52.806° and hFOVt is 32.913°; or hFOVw is 43.738° and hFOVt is 26.812°; or hFOVw is 43.935° and hFOVt is 26.855°.
  • the zoom magnification of the zoom lens 21 is greater than 1.5 times.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship ft/ENPt ⁇ 3, where ft is the focal length of the telephoto end, and ENPt is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end.
  • ft/ENPt can be, but is not limited to, 2.9, 2.8, 2.7, 2.6, 2.5, 2.4, 2.3, 2.2, 2.1, 2, 1.9, 1.8, 1.7, 1.6, 1.5, etc.
  • ft is 10.3mm and ENPt is 4.256mm; or ft is 12.5mm and ENPt is 5.208mm; or ft is 12.5mm and ENPt is 5.208mm.
  • the aperture of the telephoto end is less than 3, thereby improving the brightness and blur effect of the lens.
  • the brightness of the lens increases, more light enters the lens, which means that clear images can be captured at night.
  • the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens 21 satisfies: 5 ⁇ N ⁇ 10.
  • the total number of lenses N may be 5, or 6, or 7, or 8, or 9, or 10.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 2, the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 4, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 0.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 2, the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 4, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 2.
  • the total number of lenses N is selected between 5 and 10 by taking both imaging quality and total optical length into consideration, thereby ensuring that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging effects and at the same time achieving the beneficial effect of miniaturization of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the maximum total optical length TTLw of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 26 mm (for example, 20 mm).
  • the minimum total optical length cTTL of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 11 mm (for example, 10 mm).
  • the field of view at the wide-angle end can be below 90 degrees (such as 85 degrees).
  • the field of view angle at the telephoto end can be less than 52 degrees. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can not only be well adapted to the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness, but also has good shooting performance.
  • x is the distance sagittal height from the aspherical surface vertex when the aspherical surface is at a height h along the optical axis
  • k is the cone coefficient (see table);
  • Ai is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
  • Table 1 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1, including the radius of curvature R, the distance d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-19 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the photographed object, each lens, aperture, filter, and imaging surface in sequence. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • the interval d represents the distance d between the current surface and the subsequent surface along the optical axis.
  • the distance between surface 2 and surface 3 in Table 1 is 0.6
  • the distance between surface 3 and surface 4 is 1.261. Please refer to the explanation here when the interval d is mentioned later.
  • Table 2 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 1, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 3 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 1.
  • Table 3 includes Table 3a, Table 3b, Table 3c, and Table 3d.
  • Table 4 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 1.
  • Table 5 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 8 to 10 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 8 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 9 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 10 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 11 to 13 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 11 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Embodiment 1 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 12 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 13 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
  • Table 6 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 2, including the radius of curvature R, the distance d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-19 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the photographed object, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 7 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 2, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 8 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 2.
  • Table 8 includes Table 8a, Table 8b, Table 8c, and Table 8d.
  • Table 9 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
  • Table 10 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 16 to 18 illustrate relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 16 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 17 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 18 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 19 to 21 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 19 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 20 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 21 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
  • Table 11 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 3, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, aperture, filter, and imaging surface in sequence from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 12 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 3, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 13 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 3.
  • Table 13 includes Table 13a, Table 13b, Table 13c, and Table 13d.
  • Table 14 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
  • Table 15 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 24 to 26 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 24 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 25 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 26 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 27 to 29 show relevant curves at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 27 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 28 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 29 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 31(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 31(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7 and an eighth lens L8 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
  • Table 16 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 4, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-21 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 17 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 4, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 18 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 4.
  • Table 18 includes Table 18a, Table 18b, Table 18c, and Table 18d.
  • Table 19 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 4.
  • Table 20 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 4.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 32 to 34 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 32 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 4 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 33 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 34 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 35 to 37 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 35 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 4 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 36 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 37 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 4 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 39(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
  • Table 21 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 5, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-21 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 22 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 5, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 23 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 5.
  • Table 23 includes Table 23a, Table 23b, Table 23c, and Table 23d.
  • Table 24 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 5.
  • Table 25 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 5.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the third lens L3 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the eighth lens L8 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 40 to 42 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 40 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 5 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 41 is the axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 42 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 43 to 45 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 43 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 5 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 44 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 45 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIG. 47(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
  • Table 26 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 6, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-21 mark the surfaces of the photographed object, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 27 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 6, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 28 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 6.
  • Table 28 includes Table 28a, Table 28b, Table 28c, Table 28d, and Table 28e.
  • Table 29 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 6.
  • Table 30 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 6.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X that is, the distance between the image side of the third lens L3 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis
  • the distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X that is, the distance from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the eighth lens L8 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
  • FIGS. 48 to 50 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 48 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 49 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 50 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 51 to 53 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 51 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 6 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 52 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 53 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • the electronic device 100 includes a device body 1 and a camera module 2.
  • the device body 1 has an opening K14, and the camera module 2 is arranged in the device body 1 corresponding to the opening K14.
  • the zoom lens 21 of the camera module 2 can at least partially extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14.
  • the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to extend from the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in Figure 55).
  • the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to retract into the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in Figure 54).
  • the electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a wearable device (such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.), a television, an e-reader and other devices.
  • a wearable device such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.
  • a television an e-reader and other devices.
  • the device body 1 refers to the main part of the electronic device 100.
  • the main part includes electronic components that realize the main functions of the electronic device 100 and a housing that protects and carries these electronic components.
  • the device body 1 may include a display screen 11, a middle frame 12, and a back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 56).
  • the display screen 11 and the back cover 13 are both connected to the middle frame 12 and are arranged on opposite sides of the middle frame 12. And the sides of the middle frame 12 are exposed outside the back cover 13 and the display screen 11 .
  • the camera module 2 can be disposed on any side of the electronic device 100, which is not limited in this application.
  • the camera module 2 can be installed on the front, back, or side of the mobile phone.
  • the so-called front refers to the side of the mobile phone with the display screen 11;
  • the so-called back refers to the side of the mobile phone with the back cover 13 (as shown in FIG. 56);
  • the so-called side refers to the circumferential side of the middle frame 12 of the mobile phone. It can be understood that, depending on the type of electronic device 100 , the definitions of the front, back, side, etc. may be different, and other types of electronic devices 100 will not be described in detail here.
  • the opening K14 may be opened on the back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 56). In other embodiments, the opening K14 may also be provided on the display screen 11 ; or, the opening K14 may be provided on the middle frame 12 .
  • the camera module 2 is a rear camera.
  • the camera module is a front camera.
  • the length of the camera module will also be limited due to the thickness limitation of the electronic device.
  • the thickness of the camera module is limited, since the distance between the photosensitive element and the lens is not adjustable, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element in the camera module will be limited. If the camera module is designed to be thicker and the electronic device is thinner, it may cause the camera module to form a thicker bulge on the back cover of the electronic device. Therefore, when the camera module in the related art is applied to an electronic device, it is impossible to achieve the compatibility of thinning and lightness of the electronic device and high imaging quality of the camera module.
  • the zoom lens 21 can extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14, the camera module 2 can have a larger focal length without affecting the electronic device.
  • the thickness of the electronic device 100 is 100, thereby solving the problem of incompatibility between the thinness and lightness of the electronic device 100 and the high imaging quality of the camera module 2 .
  • the camera module 2 includes a filter 22, a photosensitive element 23 and a zoom lens 21 described in any of the following embodiments.
  • the zoom lens 21, the filter 22, and the photosensitive element 23 are arranged in sequence along the optical axis X direction.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 of the zoom lens 21 can move relative to the photosensitive element 23 along the optical axis X direction.
  • the zoom lens 21 is used to collect light from the photographed scene and focus the light on the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the filter 22 is used to eliminate unnecessary light to improve effective resolution and color reproduction.
  • the filter 22 may be, but is not limited to, an infrared filter 22 .
  • the photosensitive element 23 (Sensor) is also called a photosensitive chip or an image sensor, and is used to receive light passing through the filter 22 and convert the optical signal into an electrical signal.
  • the photosensitive element 23 may be a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) or a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS).
  • the photosensitive element 23 has an imaging surface S231, and the imaging surface S231 is a target surface on the photosensitive element 23 that receives light.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes a photosensitive element 23 having an imaging surface S231 and a filter 22 .
  • the zoom lens 21 in the above-mentioned camera module 2 will be introduced in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the object side and the image side respectively refer to: taking the zoom lens 21 as a boundary, the side where the subject is located is the object side, and the side where the image formed by the subject is located is the image side. Therefore, when shooting, light first passes through the first lens group G1 closer to the object side, and then passes through the second lens group G2 closer to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 has positive optical power.
  • the second lens group G2 has negative refractive power.
  • the optical power represents the ability of the optical system (lens or lens group) to deflect light.
  • optical power is also the reciprocal of the image-side focal length.
  • the optical power of an optical system is positive, which means it has a converging effect on light.
  • the power of an optical system is negative, which means it diffuses light.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are both used to achieve zooming through movement, so they can both be called zoom lens groups.
  • Either one of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. That is to say, the first lens group G1 is a compensation lens group, or the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group.
  • the so-called compensation lens group refers to a lens group used to compensate the position of the image plane so that the focus of objects photographed at different distances falls on the imaging plane S231.
  • the lens on the most image side of the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power.
  • the so-called lens on the most image side refers to the lens closest to the image side in the first lens group G1.
  • the zoom lens 21 has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction to zoom switch between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • the telephoto end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is maximum, and the telephoto end can also be called the telephoto state.
  • the wide-angle end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is the smallest, and the wide-angle end can also be called the wide-angle state.
  • the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end are different from the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end. Therefore, the telephoto end and the wide-angle end are two different shooting states of the zoom lens 21 , where the telephoto end is used for telephoto shooting and the wide-angle end is used for wide-angle shooting.
  • mobile phones are equipped with at least three lenses, including a telephoto lens, a main camera lens, and an ultra-wide-angle lens.
  • the telephoto lens is used for telephoto shooting
  • the main camera and ultra-wide-angle lens are both used for wide-angle shooting
  • the field of view of the main camera is smaller than that of the ultra-wide-angle lens.
  • this design will first make the entire camera module larger and increase the product cost.
  • each lens can only be equipped with a small sensor element, thus affecting the imaging. quality.
  • zoom lens 21 since both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction, this can be achieved by moving the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2
  • the zoom lens 21 zooms and switches between a telephoto end and a wide-angle end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment is equivalent to integrating the telephoto lens and the main camera lens, thereby reducing the module volume and cost, and can be matched with the outsole photosensitive element 23 (such as Using a 1/1.28-inch photosensitive element 23), it can achieve 50-megapixel imaging from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, thereby improving imaging quality (such as achieving high-pixel shooting and reducing the signal-to-noise ratio).
  • the telephoto end of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.8 ⁇ TTLt/ImgH ⁇ 3.6.
  • TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • ImgH is the image height, which refers to half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area of the imaging plane S231. It should be noted that the total optical length refers to the distance from the surface of the first lens group G1 closest to the object side to the imaging surface S231. Please refer to here for the following description of the total optical length.
  • the TTLt/ImgH may be, but is not limited to, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.33, 2.5, 2.7, 2.8, 2.81, 2.9, 3.0, 3.2, 3.3, etc.
  • TTLt is 16.518mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 17.873mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 15.268mm and ImgH is 6.450mm.
  • the zoom lens 21 can not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance. It can be understood that the miniaturized zoom lens 21 is more suitable for electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones.
  • zoomable camera modules have been applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones that have thinning and lightness requirements.
  • the zoom function requires the lens in the camera module to move relative to the photosensitive element, the total length of the camera module must be longer, which is generally greater than the thickness of the electronic device.
  • periscope cameras are usually used, and the length direction of the periscope camera is arranged in accordance with the width direction (or length direction) of the electronic device, that is, the length direction of the periscope camera is in line with the length direction of the electronic device.
  • the thickness direction is set vertically.
  • the periscope camera is provided with a prism, which is used to receive and reflect external light so that the reflected light propagates along the length of the periscope camera.
  • periscope cameras are suitable for telephoto shooting, but not for wide-angle shooting, because wide-angle shooting requires the camera to have a large field of view.
  • the thickness of the prism will also increase, which cannot satisfy electronic equipment. thickness of.
  • specifications such as aperture and peripheral brightness are also limited by the thickness of the prism.
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is applied to the electronic device 100, the zoom lens 21 can be extended or retracted through the opening K14 on the device body 1, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are opposite to the photosensitive element 23 movement to achieve zoom.
  • This structural form does not involve prisms, so the technical problems caused by the above-mentioned prisms will not arise. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by this application can improve imaging quality.
  • the zoom lens 21 also has a retracted state.
  • the relational expressions are satisfied: cTTL ⁇ TTLw and cTTL ⁇ TTLt.
  • cTTL is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state
  • TTLw is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end
  • TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the total optical length cTTL when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state is the shortest, which is smaller than the total optical length corresponding to the telephoto end and the wide-angle end.
  • cTTL is the minimum total length of the zoom lens 21 . Therefore, when the user needs to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to extend to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end. When the user does not need to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to shorten to switch to the contracted state.
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is extended to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, it extends out of the electronic device 100 through the opening K14; when the zoom lens 21 is shortened to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, In the retracted state, the zoom lens 21 is retracted into the electronic device 100 .
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies: cTTL ⁇ TTLw ⁇ TTLt; that is to say, the total optical length TTLt when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end is greater than the total optical length TTLw when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, so TTLt is the zoom lens 21 the maximum total length. From a zoom perspective, when the zoom lens 21 switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X (please refer to Figures 57 and 58 ).
  • the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X
  • the second lens group G2 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X. Move sideways (please refer to Figure 58). It should be noted that when the zoom lens 21 switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the second lens group G2 may not move, or may move toward the object side along the optical axis X.
  • the contracted state of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ cTTL/ImgH ⁇ 2.
  • cTTL is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is in the contracted state
  • ImgH is the image height.
  • cTTL/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.24, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.55, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, etc.
  • cTTL is 9mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 10mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 8.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can be applied to electronic devices 100 with thinning and lightness requirements, such as cell phone. This allows the zoom lens 21 to not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance.
  • both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are located in the device body 1 .
  • the first lens group G1 is at least partially located outside the device body 1 .
  • the second lens group G2 is at least partially located within the device body 1 .
  • the zoom lens 21 when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 is located outside the device body 1 , and the second lens group G2 is at least partially located outside the device body 1 .
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 .
  • the diaphragm 211 is disposed on the object side of the first lens group G1 or inside the first lens group G1 or on the image side of the first lens group G1 .
  • the diaphragm 211 moves along with the first lens group G1.
  • the diaphragm 211 may be disposed on the object side or the image side of the first lens group G1 , or may be disposed between two adjacent lenses constituting the first lens group G1 .
  • the diaphragm 211 is relatively fixed to the first lens group G1. During the zooming process, the diaphragm 211 moves together with the first lens group G1.
  • the diaphragm 211 can be fixed to the first lens group G1 for reasonable use. space, and the radial size of each lens in the first lens group G1 is smaller, so the diaphragm 211 is easier to be fixed with the first lens group G1.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes a third lens group G3 .
  • the third lens group G3 is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group G2 .
  • the third lens group G3 is used to correct the chief ray incident angle (Chief Ray Angle, CRA) at the wide-angle end and telephoto end.
  • CRA is a parameter of the Sensor, and the light needs to be incident on the Sensor at the required angle.
  • the zoom lens 21 the CRA at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end needs to be consistent. Therefore, the third lens group G3 is used to ensure that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging quality.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 3-5, that is, 3, 4, or 5 lenses.
  • the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 2-4, that is, 2, 3, or 4.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes the third lens group G3, the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 1-2, that is, 1 or 2.
  • each lens in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 can be a glass lens or a plastic lens.
  • Each lens can have positive or negative power.
  • the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side
  • the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side.
  • the object side of each lens in the above three lens groups can be spherical, aspheric, etc., and similarly, the image side of each lens can be spherical, aspheric, etc.
  • the number of critical points Q of at least one lens in the zoom lens 21 is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the zoom lens 21 includes at least one lens with two critical points Q or above.
  • the critical point Q refers to the tangent point on the lens surface that is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis X, in addition to the intersection point with the optical axis X.
  • the shape change of the lens in the radial direction will be relatively gentle, which can prevent the lens from being too thick and reduce the space occupied by the lens in the direction from the object side to the image side. space, so that the zoom lens 21 can be miniaturized, which is more conducive to application in electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes a first bearing member 212 and a second bearing member 213 .
  • the first bearing member 212 can be sleeved on the outer periphery of the second bearing member 213 . Both the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 can move relatively along the optical axis X direction.
  • the first lens group G1 is fixed in the first carrier 212 .
  • the first carrying member 212 is used to drive the first lens group G1 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the second lens group G2 is fixed in the second bearing member 213 .
  • the second bearing member 213 is used to drive the second lens group G2 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 .
  • the first bearing member 212 may be disposed in the opening K14 of the electronic device 100, and the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 may extend or retract the electronic device 100 through the opening K14.
  • the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be carried in other ways.
  • the structure shown in FIG. 61 is only an illustration and should not be regarded as a limitation of the present application.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1 ⁇ fw/ImgH ⁇ 1.7.
  • fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
  • fw/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.32, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, etc.
  • fw is 9.2607mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 9mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.2mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
  • the ratio of the wide-angle end focal length fw to the image height ImgH is set to be greater than 1 and less than 1.7, thereby ensuring that the wide-angle end focal length is within the common focal length range of the main camera of a mobile phone.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: -1 ⁇ f1/f2 ⁇ -0.5.
  • f1 is the focal length of the first lens group G1
  • f2 is the focal length of the second lens group G2.
  • f1/f2 can be, but is not limited to, -0.9, -0.8, -0.82, -0.7, -0.76, -0.6, -0.61, etc.
  • f1 is 8.227mm and f2 is -10.971mm; or f1 is 6.674mm and f2 is -8.551mm; or f1 is 7.071mm and f2 is -8.976mm.
  • the ratio of the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 to the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 is set to be greater than -1 and less than -0.5, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be reasonably allocated
  • the optical power relationship enables better focusing and zooming.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 0.15 ⁇ d/TTLt ⁇ 0.5.
  • ⁇ d is the distance that the first lens group G1 moves during the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
  • TTLt is the distance when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end. total optical length.
  • ⁇ d/TTLt may be, but is not limited to, 0.16, 0.17, 0.19, 0.2, 0.21, 0.26, 0.3, 0.32, 0.4, 0.45, etc.
  • ⁇ d is 3.640mm and TTLt is 16.518mm; or ⁇ d is 5.347mm and TTLt is 17.873mm; or ⁇ d is 3.648mm and TTLt is 15.268mm.
  • the ratio of the moving distance of the first lens group G1 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end and the maximum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 is reasonably set between 0.15 and 0.5, so that a smaller lens group can be used.
  • the interval variation achieves a larger zoom ratio, which is beneficial to compressing the total length of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.5 ⁇ tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt).
  • hFOVw is the half-viewing angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end
  • hFOVt is the half-viewing angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end.
  • the half picture angle refers to half of the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV).
  • tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt) may be, but is not limited to, 1.6, 1.71, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.25, etc.
  • hFOVw is 42.005° and hFOVt is 23.218°; or hFOVw is 34.821° and hFOVt is 22.486°; or hFOVw is 41.672° and hFOVt is 25.120°.
  • the zoom magnification of the zoom lens 21 is greater than 1.5 times.
  • the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: fw/ENPw ⁇ 2.4.
  • fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end
  • ENPw is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end.
  • fw/ENPw can be but is not limited to 2.3, 2.26, 2.2, 2.18, 2.1, 2.0, 1.98, 1.9, 1.8, etc.
  • fw is 9.2607mm
  • ENPw is 4.677mm
  • fw is 9mm
  • ENPw is 4.091mm
  • fw is 8.2mm
  • ENPw is 4.141mm.
  • the aperture of the wide-angle end is less than 2.4, thereby improving the brightness and blur effect of the lens.
  • the brightness of the lens increases, more light enters the lens, which means that clear images can be captured at night.
  • the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens 21 satisfies: 5 ⁇ N ⁇ 10.
  • the total number of lenses N may be 5, or 6, or 7, or 8, or 9, or 10.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 4, the total number of lenses in the second lens L2 is 3, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 0.
  • the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is four, the total number of lenses in the second lens L2 is three, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is one.
  • the total number of lenses N is selected between 5 and 10 by taking both imaging quality and total optical length into consideration, thereby ensuring that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging effects and at the same time achieving the beneficial effect of miniaturization of the zoom lens 21 .
  • the maximum total optical length TTLt of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 26 mm (for example, 20 mm).
  • the minimum total optical length cTTL of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 11 mm (for example, 10 mm).
  • the field of view at the wide-angle end can be achieved below 90 degrees.
  • the field of view angle at the telephoto end can be less than 50 degrees. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can not only be well adapted to the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness, but also has good shooting performance.
  • x is the distance sagittal height from the aspherical surface vertex when the aspherical surface is at a height h along the optical axis
  • k is the cone coefficient (see table);
  • Ai is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
  • FIGS. 57 and 58 wherein FIG. 58(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 58(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
  • Table 31 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • interval d represents the distance d between the current surface and the subsequent surface along the optical axis.
  • the distance between surface 2 and surface 3 in Table 31 is 0.465
  • the distance between surface 3 and surface 4 is 0.729. Please refer to here for information about interval d later.
  • Table 32 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 1, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 33 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 1.
  • Table 33 includes Table 33a, Table 33b, Table 33c, and Table 33d.
  • Table 34 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 1.
  • Table 35 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 1.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • FIGS. 62 to 64 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 62 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 63 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 64 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 65 to 67 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 65 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 1 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 66 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 67 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 68 and 69 wherein FIG. 69(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 69(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
  • Table 36 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 2, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-21 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 37 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Example 2, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 38 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 2.
  • Table 38 includes Table 38a, Table 38b, Table 38c, and Table 38d.
  • Table 39 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
  • Table 40 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • FIGS. 70 to 72 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 70 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 71 is the axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 72 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 73 to 75 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 73 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 74 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 75 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIG. 77(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the wide-angle end.
  • FIG. 77(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the telephoto end.
  • the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power
  • the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power.
  • the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side.
  • the second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side.
  • the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
  • Table 41 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 3, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm).
  • surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
  • Table 42 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 3, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
  • Table 43 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 3.
  • Table 43 includes Table 43a, Table 43b, Table 43c, and Table 43d.
  • Table 44 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
  • Table 45 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
  • N in the table below is the number of lenses.
  • FIGS. 78 to 80 show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 78 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 79 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 80 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
  • FIGS. 81 to 83 show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
  • Figure 81 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the telephoto end.
  • the dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
  • Figure 82 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm
  • the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
  • Figure 83 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
  • the corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.

Abstract

Provided are a zoom lens (21), a camera module (2) and an electronic device (100). The zoom lens (21) comprises a first lens group (G1) and a second lens group (G2) which are arranged from an object side to an image side, wherein the first lens group (G1) has a negative focal power, and the second lens group (G2) has a positive focal power; the zoom lens (21) has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group (G1) and the second lens group (G2) can move along an optical axis (X) to zoom and switch between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end; the number of critical points of at least one lens in the zoom lens (21) is greater than or equal to 2; and the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies the equation of 2.5 < TTLw/ImgH < 4, where TTLw is the total optical length of the zoom lens (21) when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end, and ImgH is the image height. The zoom lens can improve the imaging quality when being applied to an electronic device.

Description

变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备Zoom lenses, camera modules and electronic equipment
本申请要求于2022年4月25日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210441771.9、申请名称为“变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,本申请还要求于2022年4月25日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210439560.1、申请名称为“变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,上述在先申请的内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on April 25, 2022, with the application number 202210441771.9 and the application name "zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment". This application also claims priority in April 2022. The priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on March 25, with the application number 202210439560.1 and the application name "zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment", the contents of the above-mentioned earlier application are incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及光学成像技术领域,具体涉及一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备。This application relates to the field of optical imaging technology, specifically to a zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着摄像技术的发展,人们对于摄像头的成像品质要求越来越高。相关技术中,为了能够实现广角拍摄和望远拍摄,通常分别设置有主摄镜头和望远镜头,以进行独立拍摄,然而,该设计形式会使成像质量的提升受限。With the development of camera technology, people have higher and higher requirements for the imaging quality of cameras. In related technologies, in order to achieve wide-angle shooting and telephoto shooting, a main camera lens and a telephoto lens are usually provided separately for independent shooting. However, this design will limit the improvement of imaging quality.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备,所述变焦镜头应用于电子设备时可提升成像质量。This application provides a zoom lens, a camera module and an electronic device. The zoom lens can improve imaging quality when applied to electronic devices.
第一方面,本申请提供一种变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有负光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有正光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的广角端满足关系式:2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4;其中,TTLw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。In a first aspect, the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has negative refractive power, and the The second lens group has positive refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the position between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Zoom switching between the wide-angle ends; the number of critical points of at least one lens in the zoom lens is greater than or equal to 2; the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4; where, TTLw is The total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the wide-angle end, ImgH is the image height.
第二方面,本申请提供一种变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有正光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有负光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的望远端满足关系式:1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6;其中,TTLt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。In a second aspect, the present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has positive optical power, and the third lens group has positive optical power. The two lens groups have negative refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the distance between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Zoom switching between the wide-angle ends; at least one lens in the zoom lens has a critical point number greater than or equal to 2; the telephoto end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6; where, TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the telephoto end, and ImgH is the image height.
第三方面,本申请还提供一种摄像头模组,所述摄像头模组包括感光元件及变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头可沿光轴方向相对所述感光元件运动。In a third aspect, the present application also provides a camera module, which includes a photosensitive element and a zoom lens, and the zoom lens can move relative to the photosensitive element along the optical axis direction.
第四方面,本申请还提供一种电子设备,所述电子设备包括设备本体及摄像头模组,所述设备本体具有开口,所述摄像头模组对应所述开口设置在所述设备本体内,所述摄像头模组的变焦镜头至少部分可通过所述开口伸出或缩回所述设备本体。In a fourth aspect, the application further provides an electronic device. The electronic device includes a device body and a camera module. The device body has an opening. The camera module is disposed in the device body corresponding to the opening. The zoom lens of the camera module can at least partially extend or retract the device body through the opening.
附图说明Description of the drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施方式中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图是本申请一些实施方式,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the following will briefly introduce the drawings needed to be used in the implementation. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are some implementations of the present application. For ordinary people in the art For technical personnel, other drawings can also be obtained based on these drawings without exerting creative work.
图1为本申请一实施例提供的电子设备在一状态下的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device in a state according to an embodiment of the present application.
图2为图1所示的电子设备在另一状态下的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 1 in another state.
图3为图2所示的电子设备的另一视角的示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 2 from another perspective.
图4为本申请一实施例提供的摄像头模组的示意图。Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a camera module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图5为本申请在实施例1中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application in a retracted state.
图6为图5所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图7为本申请一实施例提供的具有临界点的透镜的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a lens with a critical point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图8为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。FIG. 8 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图9为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。FIG. 9 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图10为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。FIG. 10 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图11为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。FIG. 11 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
图12为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。FIG. 12 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
图13为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 13 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
图14为本申请在实施例2中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in a retracted state.
图15为图14所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图16为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。FIG. 16 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图17为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。FIG. 17 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图18为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。FIG. 18 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图19为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 19 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
图20为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 20 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
图21为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 21 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
图22为本申请在实施例3中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application in a retracted state.
图23为图22所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图24为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。FIG. 24 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图25为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。FIG. 25 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图26为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。FIG. 26 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图27为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 27 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
图28为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 28 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
图29为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 29 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
图30为本申请在实施例4中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 4 of the present application in a retracted state.
图31为图30所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图32为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 32 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 4 is at the wide-angle end.
图33为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。FIG. 33 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图34为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。FIG. 34 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 4 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图35为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 35 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
图36为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 36 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
图37为实施例4所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 37 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end.
图38为本申请在实施例5中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 5 of the present application in a retracted state.
图39为图38所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图40为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 40 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 5 is at the wide-angle end.
图41为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 41 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图42为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。Figure 42 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图43为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 43 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
图44为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 44 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
图45为实施例5所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 45 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 5 when it is at the telephoto end.
图46为本申请在实施例6中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 6 of the present application in a retracted state.
图47为图46所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图48为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 48 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end.
图49为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 49 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end.
图50为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。Figure 50 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 6 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图51为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 51 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
图52为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 52 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
图53为实施例6所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 53 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end.
图54为本申请一实施例提供的电子设备在一状态下的示意图。FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of an electronic device in a state according to an embodiment of the present application.
图55为图54所示的电子设备在另一状态下的示意图。FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 54 in another state.
图56为图55所示的电子设备的另一视角的示意图。FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the electronic device shown in FIG. 55 from another perspective.
图57为本申请在实施例1中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。Figure 57 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 of the present application in a retracted state.
图58为图57所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图59为本申请一实施例提供的包含第三透镜组的变焦镜头的示意图。FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram of a zoom lens including a third lens group provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图60为本申请一实施例提供的具有临界点的透镜的示意图。Figure 60 is a schematic diagram of a lens with a critical point provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图61为本申请一实施例提供的包含第一承载件和第二承载件的变焦透镜的示意图。FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram of a zoom lens including a first bearing member and a second bearing member according to an embodiment of the present application.
图62为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 62 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end.
图63为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 63 is an axial chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end.
图64为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。FIG. 64 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图65为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 65 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 1 is at the telephoto end.
图66为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 66 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end.
图67为实施例1所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 67 is a distortion curve when the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 1 is at the telephoto end.
图68为本申请在实施例2中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。Figure 68 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 of the present application in a retracted state.
图69为图68所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图70为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 70 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the wide-angle end.
图71为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 71 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图72为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。Figure 72 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图73为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 73 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 2 is at the telephoto end.
图74为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 74 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
图75为实施例2所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 75 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end.
图76为本申请在实施例3中提供的变焦镜头处于收缩状态的示意图。Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 of the present application in a retracted state.
图77为图76所示的变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端的示意图。FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
图78为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。Figure 78 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
图79为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 79 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end.
图80为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。Figure 80 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Embodiment 3 when it is at the wide-angle end.
图81为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。Figure 81 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens shown in Example 3 is at the telephoto end.
图82为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。Figure 82 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
图83为实施例3所示的变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。Figure 83 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens shown in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有付出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are only some of the embodiments of the present application, rather than all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts fall within the scope of protection of this application.
在本文中提及“实施例”或“实施方式”意味着,结合实施例或实施方式描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。Reference herein to "an embodiment" or "an implementation" means that a particular feature, structure or characteristic described in connection with the example or implementation may be included in at least one embodiment of the present application. The appearances of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. Those skilled in the art understand, both explicitly and implicitly, that the embodiments described herein may be combined with other embodiments.
本申请提供一种变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有负光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有正光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的广角端满足关系式:2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4;其中,TTLw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。The present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has negative refractive power, and the second lens group It has positive optical power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group are movable along the optical axis direction to adjust the zoom lens at the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Switch between zooms; at least one lens in the zoom lens has a critical point number greater than or equal to 2; the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4; where, TTLw is the zoom lens The total optical length at the wide-angle end, ImgH is the image height.
其中,所述变焦镜头还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt,其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的光学总长。Wherein, the zoom lens also has a retracted state. When the zoom lens is in the retracted state, the relationship is satisfied: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt, where cTTL is the optical power of the zoom lens when it is in the retracted state. The total length, TTLt, is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the telephoto end.
其中,所述变焦镜头的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。Wherein, the shrinkage state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2.
其中,所述变焦镜头从所述收缩状态切换至所述望远端的过程中,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组沿光轴往物侧方向移动。Wherein, when the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the telephoto end, the first lens group and the second lens group move toward the object side along the optical axis.
其中,所述变焦镜头从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴向像侧移动,所述第二透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动。Wherein, during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group moves toward the image side along the optical axis, and the second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
其中,所述变焦镜头还包括光阑,所述光阑设置于所述第二透镜组的物侧或者所述第二透镜组的内部,所述变焦镜头在变焦过程中,所述光阑和所述第二透镜组同步移动。Wherein, the zoom lens further includes an aperture, and the aperture is arranged on the object side of the second lens group or inside the second lens group. During the zooming process of the zoom lens, the aperture and The second lens group moves synchronously.
其中,所述变焦镜头还包括具有负光焦度的第三透镜组,所述第三透镜组固定设置于所述第二透镜组的像侧。Wherein, the zoom lens further includes a third lens group with negative refractive power, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
其中,所述第三透镜组中的透镜总数为1-2枚。The total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
其中,所述第一透镜组中的透镜总数为2-3枚;和/或,所述第二透镜组中的透镜总数为3-5枚。Wherein, the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 2-3; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 3-5.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7,其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relational expression: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:-3<f1/f2<-1.2,其中,f1为所述第一透镜组的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组的焦距。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -3<f1/f2<-1.2, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25,其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第二透镜组移动的距离。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25, where Δd is the movement of the second lens group during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. distance.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt),其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头处于望远端时的半画角。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end. half-picture angle.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式ft/ENPt<3,其中,ft为所述望远端的焦距,ENPt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的入射瞳直径。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship ft/ENPt<3, where ft is the focal length of the telephoto end, and ENPt is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end.
其中,所述第一透镜组最物侧的透镜具有负光焦度,和/或,所述第二透镜组最物侧的透镜具有正光焦度。Wherein, the most object-side lens of the first lens group has negative refractive power, and/or the most object-side lens of the second lens group has positive refractive power.
其中,所述变焦镜头中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。Wherein, the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5≤N≤10.
本申请提供一种变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有正光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有负光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的望远端满足关系式:1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6;其中,TTLt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。The present application provides a zoom lens, which includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has positive optical power, and the second lens group has Negative refractive power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the position between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Switch between zooms; at least one lens in the zoom lens has a critical point number greater than or equal to 2; the telephoto end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6; where, TTLt is the zoom The total optical length of the lens when it is at the telephoto end, and ImgH is the image height.
其中,所述变焦镜头还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt,其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的光学总长。Wherein, the zoom lens also has a retracted state. When the zoom lens is in the retracted state, the relationship is satisfied: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt, where cTTL is the optical power of the zoom lens when it is in the retracted state. The total length, TTLw, is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the wide-angle end.
其中,所述变焦镜头的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。Wherein, the shrinkage state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2.
其中,所述变焦镜头从所述收缩状态切换至所述广角端的过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴往物侧方向移动。Wherein, when the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
其中,所述变焦镜头从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动,所述第二透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动。Wherein, during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis, and the second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
其中,所述变焦镜头还包括光阑,所述光阑设置于所述第一透镜组的物侧或者所述第一透镜组的内部或者所述第一透镜组的像侧,所述变焦镜头在变焦过程中,所述光阑跟随所述第一透镜组移动。Wherein, the zoom lens further includes an aperture, and the aperture is disposed on the object side of the first lens group or inside the first lens group or on the image side of the first lens group. The zoom lens During the zooming process, the diaphragm moves along with the first lens group.
其中,所述变焦镜头还包括第三透镜组,所述第三透镜组固定设置于所述第二透镜组的像侧。Wherein, the zoom lens further includes a third lens group, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
其中,所述第三透镜组中的透镜总数为1-2枚。The total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
其中,所述第一透镜组中的透镜总数为3-5枚;和/或,所述第二透镜组中的透镜总数为2-4枚。Wherein, the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 3-5; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 2-4.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7,其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relational expression: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:-1<f1/f2<-0.5,其中,f1为所述第一透镜组的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组的焦距。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -1<f1/f2<-0.5, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5,其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组移动的距离。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5, where Δd is the movement of the first lens group during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. distance.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt),其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头处于望远端时的半画角。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end. half-picture angle.
其中,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:fw/ENPw<2.4,其中,fw为所述广角端的焦距,ENPw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的入射瞳直径。Wherein, the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: fw/ENPw<2.4, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end, and ENPw is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end.
其中,所述第一透镜组最像侧的透镜具有正光焦度。Wherein, the lens on the most image side of the first lens group has positive refractive power.
其中,所述变焦镜头中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。Wherein, the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5≤N≤10.
本申请还提供一种摄像头模组,所述摄像头模组包括感光元件及变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头可沿光轴方向相对所述感光元件运动。This application also provides a camera module. The camera module includes a photosensitive element and a zoom lens. The zoom lens can move relative to the photosensitive element along the optical axis direction.
本申请还提供一种电子设备,所述电子设备包括设备本体及摄像头模组,所述设备本体具有开口,所述摄像头模组对应所述开口设置在所述设备本体内,所述摄像头模组的变焦镜头至少部分可通过所述开口伸出或缩回所述设备本体。This application also provides an electronic device. The electronic device includes a device body and a camera module. The device body has an opening. The camera module is arranged in the device body corresponding to the opening. The camera module The zoom lens can be extended or retracted from the device body at least partially through the opening.
以下分为第一部分和第二部分来介绍本申请提供的两种不同的变焦镜头、摄像头模组及电子设备。其中,第一部分来自于申请号为202210441771.9的在先申请,第二部分来自于申请号202210439560.1的在先申请。The following is divided into the first part and the second part to introduce the two different zoom lenses, camera modules and electronic equipment provided by this application. Among them, the first part comes from the prior application with application number 202210441771.9, and the second part comes from the prior application with application number 202210439560.1.
第一部分(对应参照图1至图53)Part 1 (corresponding to Figure 1 to Figure 53)
请参照图1至图3,本申请提供一种电子设备100,所述电子设备100包括设备本体1及摄像头模组2。所述设备本体1具有开口K14,所述摄像头模组2对应所述开口K14设置在所述设备本体1内。所述摄像头模组2的变焦镜头21至少部分可通过所述开口K14伸出或缩回所述设备本体1。当用户需要拍摄时,可控制变焦镜头21通过开口K14伸出于设备本体1(如图2所示)。当用户不需要拍摄时,可控制变焦镜头21通过开口K14缩回于设备本体1内(如图1所示)。Please refer to FIGS. 1 to 3 . This application provides an electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 includes a device body 1 and a camera module 2 . The device body 1 has an opening K14, and the camera module 2 is arranged in the device body 1 corresponding to the opening K14. The zoom lens 21 of the camera module 2 can at least partially extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14. When the user needs to take pictures, the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to extend from the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in FIG. 2 ). When the user does not need to take pictures, the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to retract into the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in FIG. 1 ).
其中,所述电子设备100可以是手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、可穿戴设备(如智能手表、手环、VR设备等)、电视机、电子阅读器等设备。The electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a wearable device (such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.), a television, an e-reader and other devices.
所述设备本体1是指电子设备100的主体部分,主体部分包括实现电子设备100主要功能的电子组件以及保护、承载这些电子组件的壳体。设备本体1可以包括显示屏11、中框12、后盖13(如图3所示),显示屏11和后盖13均连接于中框12,且设置于中框12的相背两侧,且中框12的侧面显露于后盖13与显示屏11之外。The device body 1 refers to the main part of the electronic device 100. The main part includes electronic components that realize the main functions of the electronic device 100 and a housing that protects and carries these electronic components. The device body 1 may include a display screen 11, a middle frame 12, and a back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 3). The display screen 11 and the back cover 13 are both connected to the middle frame 12, and are arranged on opposite sides of the middle frame 12. And the sides of the middle frame 12 are exposed outside the back cover 13 and the display screen 11 .
需说明的是,根据实际需求,摄像头模组2可以设置于电子设备100的任意一侧,本申请对此不作限定。以手机为例,所述摄像头模组2可以设置于手机的正面、背面、侧面。其中,所谓正面是指手机具备显示屏11的一侧;所谓背面是指手机具备后盖13的一侧;所谓侧面是指手机的中框12的环周侧。可以 理解的是,电子设备100的类型不同,其正面、背面、侧面等称呼的定义可能不同,对于其它类型的电子设备100在此不一一详述。It should be noted that, according to actual needs, the camera module 2 can be disposed on any side of the electronic device 100, which is not limited in this application. Taking a mobile phone as an example, the camera module 2 can be installed on the front, back, or side of the mobile phone. The so-called front refers to the side of the mobile phone with the display screen 11; the so-called back refers to the side of the mobile phone with the back cover 13; and the so-called side refers to the circumferential side of the middle frame 12 of the mobile phone. It can be understood that, depending on the type of electronic device 100, the definitions of the front, back, side, etc. may be different, and other types of electronic devices 100 will not be described in detail here.
进一步的,所述开口K14可开设在所述后盖13上。在其他实施方式中,所述开口K14也可开设在所述显示屏11上;或者,所述开口K14开设在所述中框12上。当所述后盖13具有所述开口K14时,所述摄像头模组2为后置摄像头。当所述显示屏11上具有所述开口K14时,所述摄像模组为前置摄像头。可以理解的是,本实施方式中对所述设备本体1的介绍仅仅是所述摄像头模组2的一种应用场景的介绍,不应当理解为对本申请所提供的电子设备100的限定。Furthermore, the opening K14 may be opened on the back cover 13 . In other embodiments, the opening K14 may also be provided on the display screen 11 ; or, the opening K14 may be provided on the middle frame 12 . When the back cover 13 has the opening K14, the camera module 2 is a rear camera. When the opening K14 is provided on the display screen 11, the camera module is a front camera. It can be understood that the introduction of the device body 1 in this embodiment is only an introduction to an application scenario of the camera module 2 and should not be understood as a limitation of the electronic device 100 provided in this application.
在相关技术中,随着人们对于具备拍摄功能的电子设备的成像质量的追求越来越高,比如,高画质、高像素,通常需要将摄像头模组中的感光元件以及镜头进行设计。比如,采用大底的感光元件,由于感光元件与镜头之间的距离不可调,因此,需要对应将镜头和感光元件之间的距离设计得较长。在视场角(Field of Vision,FOV)基本不变的情况下,镜头和感光元件之间的距离较长,意味着摄像头模组的总长也会较长。当摄像头模组应用于电子设备中时,带来的结果就是会使得电子设备机身越来越厚,不利于电子设备的轻薄化。换言之,对于轻薄化的电子设备而言,由于电子设备的厚度限制,摄像头模组的长度也会受限。而当摄像头模组的厚度受限时,由于感光元件与镜头之间的距离不可调,会导致摄镜头模组中的镜头到感光元件之间的距离受限。若设计摄镜头模组的厚度较厚,电子设备的厚度较薄,可能导致摄像头模组在电子设备的后盖上形成较厚的凸起。因此,相关技术中的摄像头模组应用于电子设备时无法实现电子设备的轻薄化和摄像头模组的高成像质量的兼容性。In related technologies, as people pursue higher and higher imaging quality of electronic devices with shooting functions, such as high image quality and high pixels, it is usually necessary to design the photosensitive elements and lenses in the camera module. For example, if a sensor with an outsole is used, since the distance between the sensor and the lens cannot be adjusted, the distance between the lens and the sensor needs to be designed to be longer. When the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV) is basically unchanged, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element is longer, which means that the total length of the camera module will also be longer. When camera modules are used in electronic devices, the result is that the body of the electronic device will become thicker and thicker, which is not conducive to the thinning of the electronic device. In other words, for thin and light electronic devices, the length of the camera module will also be limited due to the thickness limitation of the electronic device. When the thickness of the camera module is limited, since the distance between the photosensitive element and the lens is not adjustable, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element in the camera module will be limited. If the camera module is designed to be thicker and the electronic device is thinner, it may cause the camera module to form a thicker bulge on the back cover of the electronic device. Therefore, when the camera module in the related art is applied to an electronic device, it is impossible to achieve the compatibility of thinning and lightness of the electronic device and high imaging quality of the camera module.
在本申请实施例提供的电子设备100中,由于变焦镜头21可通过开口K14实现伸出或缩回设备本体1,从而可实现摄像头模组2具有较大焦距的同时,又不会影响电子设备100的厚度,进而解决电子设备100的轻薄化和摄像头模组2的高成像质量的不能兼容的问题。In the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application, since the zoom lens 21 can extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14, the camera module 2 can have a larger focal length without affecting the electronic device. The thickness of the electronic device 100 is 100, thereby solving the problem of incompatibility between the thinness and lightness of the electronic device 100 and the high imaging quality of the camera module 2 .
请参照图4,本申请还提供一种摄像头模组2,所述摄像头模组2包括滤光片22、感光元件23及以下任意实施方式中所描述的变焦镜头21。所述变焦镜头21、滤光片22、感光元件23沿光轴X方向依次排布。在进行拍摄时,外界光线依次经过变焦镜头21、滤光片22,最后到达感光元件23。所述变焦镜头21的第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2可沿光轴X方向相对所述感光元件23运动。需说明的是,图4所示的结构仅是示例性说明,不应视为是对本申请的限制。Please refer to Figure 4. This application also provides a camera module 2. The camera module 2 includes a filter 22, a photosensitive element 23 and a zoom lens 21 described in any of the following embodiments. The zoom lens 21, the filter 22, and the photosensitive element 23 are arranged in sequence along the optical axis X direction. When shooting, the external light passes through the zoom lens 21 and the filter 22 in sequence, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 23 . The first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 of the zoom lens 21 can move relative to the photosensitive element 23 along the optical axis X direction. It should be noted that the structure shown in Figure 4 is only an illustrative description and should not be regarded as a limitation of the present application.
其中,所述变焦镜头21用于收集被摄景物的光线,并将光线聚焦于感光元件23。所述滤光片22用于消除不必要的光线,以提高有效分辨率和彩色还原性。所述滤光片22可以但不仅限于为红外滤光片22。所述感光元件23(Sensor)也称为感光芯片或图像传感器,其用于接收穿过滤光片22的光线,并将光信号转换为电信号。感光元件23可以是电荷耦合器件(Charge Coupled Device,CCD),也可以是互补金属氧化物导体器件(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor,CMOS)。感光元件23具有成像面S231,所述成像面S231为感光元件23上接收光线的靶面。The zoom lens 21 is used to collect light from the photographed scene and focus the light on the photosensitive element 23 . The filter 22 is used to eliminate unnecessary light to improve effective resolution and color reproduction. The filter 22 may be, but is not limited to, an infrared filter 22 . The photosensitive element 23 (Sensor) is also called a photosensitive chip or an image sensor, and is used to receive light passing through the filter 22 and convert the optical signal into an electrical signal. The photosensitive element 23 may be a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) or a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS). The photosensitive element 23 has an imaging surface S231, and the imaging surface S231 is a target surface on the photosensitive element 23 that receives light.
需说明的是,以下关于变焦镜头21的实施例中所涉及到的成像面S231、滤光片22,是用于辅助描述第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的位置情况等,并非是指变焦镜头21包含具有成像面S231的感光元件23以及滤光片22。It should be noted that the imaging surface S231 and the optical filter 22 involved in the following embodiments of the zoom lens 21 are used to assist in describing the positions and conditions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, and are not The zoom lens 21 includes a photosensitive element 23 having an imaging surface S231 and a filter 22 .
下面结合附图详细介绍上述摄像头模组2中的变焦镜头21。The zoom lens 21 in the above-mentioned camera module 2 will be introduced in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
请参照图5,本申请还提供一种变焦镜头21,所述变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2。其中,物侧和像侧分别是指:以变焦镜头21为界,被拍摄物体所在的一侧为物侧,被拍摄物体形成的图像所在的一侧为像侧。因此,在进行拍摄时,光线首先经过更靠近物侧的第一透镜组G1,再经过更靠近像侧的第二透镜组G2。Referring to FIG. 5 , the present application also provides a zoom lens 21 . The zoom lens 21 includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side. The object side and the image side respectively refer to: with the zoom lens 21 as the boundary, the side where the photographed object is located is the object side, and the side where the image formed by the photographed object is located is the image side. Therefore, when shooting, light first passes through the first lens group G1 closer to the object side, and then passes through the second lens group G2 closer to the image side.
所述第一透镜组G1具有负光焦度,所述第二透镜组G2具有正光焦度。其中,所述光焦度(focal power)表征光学系统(透镜或透镜组)偏折光线的能力。一般而言,光焦度也为像方焦距的倒数。光学系统的光焦度为正,表示其对光线有汇聚作用。光学系统的光焦度为负,表示其对光线有发散作用。The first lens group G1 has negative optical power, and the second lens group G2 has positive optical power. Wherein, the optical power (focal power) represents the ability of the optical system (lens or lens group) to deflect light. Generally speaking, optical power is also the reciprocal of the image-side focal length. The optical power of an optical system is positive, which means it has a converging effect on light. The power of an optical system is negative, which means it diffuses light.
第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2均用于通过移动实现变焦,因而都可称之为变焦透镜组。The first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are both used to achieve zooming through movement, so they can both be called zoom lens groups.
第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2两者中的任意一个为补偿透镜组。也就是说,第一透镜组G1为补偿透镜组,或者,第二透镜组G2为补偿透镜组。其中,所谓的补偿透镜组是指用于补偿像面位置,以使不同距离的被拍摄物的焦点落于成像面S231上的透镜组。Either one of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. That is to say, the first lens group G1 is a compensation lens group, or the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. The so-called compensation lens group refers to a lens group used to compensate the position of the image plane so that the focus of objects photographed at different distances falls on the imaging plane S231.
可选的,所述第一透镜组G1最物侧的透镜具有负光焦度,从而可使变焦镜头21提供更好的成像效果。Optionally, the object-side lens of the first lens group G1 has negative refractive power, so that the zoom lens 21 can provide better imaging effects.
可选的,所述第二透镜组G2最物侧的透镜具有正光焦度,从而可使变焦镜头21提供更好的成像效果。Optionally, the object-side lens of the second lens group G2 has positive refractive power, so that the zoom lens 21 can provide better imaging effects.
其中,第一透镜组G1最物侧的透镜是指第一透镜组G1中最靠近物侧的那一枚透镜。同理,第二透镜组G2最物侧的透镜是指第二透镜组G2中最靠近物侧的那一枚透镜。Wherein, the most object-side lens of the first lens group G1 refers to the lens in the first lens group G1 that is closest to the object side. Similarly, the most object-side lens of the second lens group G2 refers to the lens closest to the object side in the second lens group G2.
请参照图6,所述变焦镜头21具有望远端和广角端。所述第一透镜组G1和所述第二透镜组G2均可沿光轴X方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换。其中,望远端是指所述变焦镜头21的焦距最大时的状态,望远端也可称之为望远状态。广角端是指所述变焦镜头21的焦距最小时的状态,广角端也可称之为广角状态。变焦镜头21处于望远端时第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的所处位置不同于 变焦镜头21处于广角端时第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的位置。因此,望远端和广角端为变焦镜头21的两种不同的拍摄状态,其中,望远端用于望远拍摄,广角端用于广角拍摄。Referring to FIG. 6 , the zoom lens 21 has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction to zoom switch between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. The telephoto end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is maximum, and the telephoto end can also be called the telephoto state. The wide-angle end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is the smallest, and the wide-angle end can also be called the wide-angle state. The positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end are different from the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end. Therefore, the telephoto end and the wide-angle end are two different shooting states of the zoom lens 21 , where the telephoto end is used for telephoto shooting and the wide-angle end is used for wide-angle shooting.
相关技术中,手机上至少搭载了三个镜头,包括望远镜头、主摄镜头、超广角镜头。其中,望远镜头用于望远拍摄,主摄像头和超广角镜头都用于广角拍摄,且主摄像头的视场角小于超广角镜头的视场角。然而,该设计形式首先会导致整个摄像头模组的体积较大,也会增加产品成本,此外,由于不同用途的镜头分开独立设置,导致每个镜头仅能搭配小底的感光元件,从而影响成像质量。In related technology, mobile phones are equipped with at least three lenses, including a telephoto lens, a main camera lens, and an ultra-wide-angle lens. Among them, the telephoto lens is used for telephoto shooting, and the main camera and ultra-wide-angle lens are both used for wide-angle shooting, and the field of view of the main camera is smaller than that of the ultra-wide-angle lens. However, this design will first make the entire camera module larger and increase the product cost. In addition, since the lenses for different purposes are set up independently, each lens can only be equipped with a small sensor element, thus affecting the imaging. quality.
在本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头21中,由于第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2均可沿光轴X方向移动,因而可通过移动第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2来实现变焦镜头21在望远端和广角端之间变焦切换。相较于相关技术而言,本实施例提供的变焦镜头21相当于将望远镜头和主摄镜头一体化,从而可以减小模组体积,降低成本,并且可搭配大底的感光元件23(比如采用1/1.28inch的感光元件23),实现从广角端到望远端的5000万像素成像,从而提高成像质量(比如实现高像素拍摄、降低信噪比)。In the zoom lens 21 provided in the embodiment of the present application, since both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction, this can be achieved by moving the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 The zoom lens 21 zooms and switches between a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Compared with related technologies, the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment is equivalent to integrating the telephoto lens and the main camera lens, thereby reducing the module volume and cost, and can be matched with the outsole photosensitive element 23 (such as Using a 1/1.28-inch photosensitive element 23), it can achieve 50-megapixel imaging from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, thereby improving imaging quality (such as achieving high-pixel shooting and reducing the signal-to-noise ratio).
可选的,所述变焦镜头21的广角端满足关系式:2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4。其中,TTLw为所述变焦镜头21处于所述广角端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高,所述像高是指成像面S231有效像素区域对角线长的一半。需说明的是,所述光学总长是指第一透镜组G1最靠近物侧的表面至成像面S231的距离,以下涉及到光学总长的描述请参考此处。Optionally, the wide-angle end of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4. Wherein, TTLw is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the wide-angle end, ImgH is the image height, and the image height refers to half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area of the imaging surface S231. It should be noted that the total optical length refers to the distance from the surface of the first lens group G1 closest to the object side to the imaging surface S231. Please refer to here for the following description of the total optical length.
所述TTLw/ImgH可以为但不限于为2.6、2.7、2.8、2.9、3.0、3.1、3.2、3.3、3.4、3.5、3.6、3.7、3.8、3.9等。例如,TTLw为20mm,ImgH为6.450mm;或者TTLt为23.378mm,ImgH为6.450mm;或者TTLt为23.5mm,ImgH为6.450mm。The TTLw/ImgH may be, but is not limited to, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, etc. For example, TTLw is 20mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 23.378mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 23.5mm and ImgH is 6.450mm.
由于变焦镜头21满足上述关系式,使得变焦镜头21不仅得以小型化,还可以有效的保持良好的光学性能。可以理解的是,小型化的变焦镜头21更适用于有轻薄化要求的电子设备100,比如手机。Since the zoom lens 21 satisfies the above relational expression, the zoom lens 21 can not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance. It can be understood that the miniaturized zoom lens 21 is more suitable for electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones.
在相关技术中,手机等具有轻薄化要求的电子设备上已应用可变焦的摄像头模组。具体来讲,由于变焦功能要求摄像头模组内的透镜可相对感光元件移动,因此,摄像头模组的总长度必然较长,一般而言大于电子设备的厚度。为了避免电子设备过厚,目前通常采用潜望式摄像头,且将潜望式摄像头的长度方向顺应电子设备的宽度方向(或长度方向)进行布置,即潜望式摄像头的长度方向与电子设备的厚度方向垂直设置。潜望式摄像头中设有棱镜,该棱镜用于接收并反射外界光线,以使反射后的光线沿潜望式摄像头的长度方向进行传播。然而,潜望式摄像头适用于望远拍摄,而不适用于广角拍摄,因为广角拍摄要求摄像头具有大的视场角,视场角增大,棱镜的厚度也将变大,进而不能满足电子设备的厚度。而且,光圈、周边亮度等规格也会受到棱镜的厚度的限制。In related technologies, zoomable camera modules have been applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones that have thinning and lightness requirements. Specifically, since the zoom function requires the lens in the camera module to move relative to the photosensitive element, the total length of the camera module must be longer, which is generally greater than the thickness of the electronic device. In order to prevent electronic devices from being too thick, periscope cameras are usually used, and the length direction of the periscope camera is arranged in accordance with the width direction (or length direction) of the electronic device, that is, the length direction of the periscope camera is in line with the length direction of the electronic device. The thickness direction is set vertically. The periscope camera is provided with a prism, which is used to receive and reflect external light so that the reflected light propagates along the length of the periscope camera. However, periscope cameras are suitable for telephoto shooting, but not for wide-angle shooting, because wide-angle shooting requires the camera to have a large field of view. As the field of view increases, the thickness of the prism will also increase, which cannot satisfy electronic equipment. thickness of. Furthermore, specifications such as aperture and peripheral brightness are also limited by the thickness of the prism.
在本申请中,当变焦镜头21应用于电子设备100时,变焦镜头21可通过设备本体1上的开口K14伸出或缩回,使得第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2相对感光元件23运动,从而实现变焦。在该结构形式中不涉及棱镜,从而不会产生上述棱镜所带来的技术问题。因此,本申请提供的变焦镜头21可以提升成像质量。In this application, when the zoom lens 21 is applied to the electronic device 100, the zoom lens 21 can be extended or retracted through the opening K14 on the device body 1, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are opposite to the photosensitive element 23 movement to achieve zoom. This structural form does not involve prisms, so the technical problems caused by the above-mentioned prisms will not arise. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by this application can improve imaging quality.
请参照图5,所述变焦镜头21还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt。其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLt为所述变焦镜头21处于所述望远端时的光学总长。换而言之,在上述三种状态中,当变焦镜头21处于收缩状态时的光学总长cTTL最短,小于望远端和广角端对应的光学总长,因而cTTL为变焦镜头21的最小光学总长。因此,当用户需要拍摄时,则可以控制变焦镜头21伸长,以切换到广角端或望远端,当不需要拍摄时,则控制变焦镜头21缩短,以切换到收缩状态。结合前面实施例提供的电子设备100来讲,当变焦镜头21伸长以切换到广角端或望远端时,则通过开口K14伸出于电子设备100之外;当变焦镜头21缩短以切换到收缩状态时,变焦镜头21则缩回于电子设备100内。Please refer to FIG. 5 . The zoom lens 21 also has a retracted state. When the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, the relationship expressions are satisfied: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt. Wherein, cTTL is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, and TTLt is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end. In other words, among the above three states, the total optical length cTTL when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state is the shortest, which is smaller than the total optical length corresponding to the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Therefore, cTTL is the minimum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 . Therefore, when the user needs to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to extend to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end. When the user does not need to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to shorten to switch to the contracted state. With reference to the electronic device 100 provided in the previous embodiment, when the zoom lens 21 is extended to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, it extends out of the electronic device 100 through the opening K14; when the zoom lens 21 is shortened to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, In the retracted state, the zoom lens 21 is retracted into the electronic device 100 .
进一步的,变焦镜头21满足:cTTL<TTLt<TTLw。也就是说,当变焦镜头21处于广角端时的光学总长TTLw大于变焦镜头21处于望远端时的光学总长TTLt,因而TTLw为变焦镜头21的最大光学总长。Furthermore, the zoom lens 21 satisfies: cTTL<TTLt<TTLw. That is to say, the total optical length TTLw when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end is greater than the total optical length TTLt when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end, so TTLw is the maximum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 .
从变焦的角度来讲,所述变焦镜头21从所述收缩状态切换至所述望远端的过程中,所述第一透镜组G1和所述第二透镜组G2沿光轴往物侧方向移动(请参照图5和图6)。所述变焦镜头21从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组G1沿光轴向像侧移动,所述第二透镜组G2沿光轴向物侧移动(请参照图6)。From a zoom perspective, when the zoom lens 21 switches from the retracted state to the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 move toward the object side along the optical axis. Move (please refer to Figure 5 and Figure 6). During the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 moves toward the image side along the optical axis, and the second lens group G2 moves toward the object side along the optical axis. (Please refer to Figure 6).
可选的,所述变焦镜头的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。Optionally, the contraction state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2. Wherein, cTTL is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is in the contracted state, and ImgH is the image height.
其中,cTTL/ImgH可以但不仅限于为1.1、1.2、1.24、1.3、1.4、1.5、1.55、1.6、1.7、1.8、1.9等。例如,cTTL为10.5mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者cTTL为9.97mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者cTTL为9.98mm,ImgH为6.45mm。Among them, cTTL/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.24, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.55, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, etc. For example, cTTL is 10.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 9.97mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 9.98mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
由以上例举的数据可知,当ImgH的取值为6.45mm时,变焦镜头21的最大光学总长TTLw在20mm左右,最小光学总长cTTL在10mm左右,因此本申请提供的变焦镜头21可适用于具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上,比如手机。这使得变焦镜头21不仅得以小型化,还可以有效的保持良好的光学性能。From the data exemplified above, it can be seen that when the value of ImgH is 6.45mm, the maximum total optical length TTLw of the zoom lens 21 is about 20mm, and the minimum total optical length cTTL is about 10mm. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can be applied to applications with Electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones. This allows the zoom lens 21 to not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance.
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于收缩状态时,第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2都位于设备本体1内。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are located in the device body 1 .
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于广角端和望远端时,第一透镜组G1至少部分位于设备本体1外,第二透镜组G2至少部分位于设备本体外。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 is at least partially located outside the device body 1, and the second lens group G2 is at least partially located outside the device body.
请参照图6,所述变焦镜头还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于所述第二透镜组G2的物侧或者所述第二透镜组G2的内部。也就是说,光阑211可以设置在第二透镜组G2的外侧,也可以设置在第二透镜组G2中相邻的两枚透镜之间。所述变焦镜头在变焦过程中,所述光阑211和所述第二透镜组G2同步移动。也就是说,光阑211和第二透镜组G2相对固定,所谓相对固定是指光阑211和第二透镜组G2一起移动。光阑211可以固定在第二透镜组G2上,也可以固定在其他部件上,在此不作限定。由于第二透镜组G2中各透镜之间的排布较为稀疏,而第一透镜组G1中各透镜之间的排布较为紧密,因此,将光阑211与第二透镜组G2设置在一起可以合理利用空间,且第二透镜组G2中各透镜的径向尺寸较小,因而光阑211更容易与第二透镜组G2设置在一起。Referring to FIG. 6 , the zoom lens further includes an aperture 211 , which is disposed on the object side of the second lens group G2 or inside the second lens group G2 . That is to say, the diaphragm 211 may be disposed outside the second lens group G2, or may be disposed between two adjacent lenses in the second lens group G2. During the zooming process of the zoom lens, the diaphragm 211 and the second lens group G2 move synchronously. That is to say, the aperture 211 and the second lens group G2 are relatively fixed. The so-called relative fixation means that the aperture 211 and the second lens group G2 move together. The diaphragm 211 can be fixed on the second lens group G2 or can be fixed on other components, which is not limited here. Since the arrangement of the lenses in the second lens group G2 is relatively sparse, while the arrangement of the lenses in the first lens group G1 is relatively dense, it is possible to arrange the diaphragm 211 and the second lens group G2 together. The space is rationally utilized, and the radial size of each lens in the second lens group G2 is smaller, so the diaphragm 211 is more easily disposed together with the second lens group G2.
可选的,请参照图5和图6,所述变焦镜头21还包括具有负光焦度的第三透镜组G3,所述第三透镜组G3固定设置于所述第二透镜组G2的像侧。所述第三透镜组G3用于补正广角端和望远端的主光线入射角度(Chief Ray Angle,CRA),CRA是Sensor的一个参数,光线需要以要求的角度入射到Sensor。对于变焦镜头21来说,需要广角端和望远端的CRA要一致。因此,第三透镜组G3的设置可以确保变焦镜头21具有较好的成像质量。Optionally, please refer to Figures 5 and 6. The zoom lens 21 also includes a third lens group G3 with negative refractive power. The third lens group G3 is fixedly disposed on the image of the second lens group G2. side. The third lens group G3 is used to correct the chief ray incident angle (Chief Ray Angle, CRA) at the wide-angle end and telephoto end. CRA is a parameter of the Sensor, and the light needs to be incident on the Sensor at the required angle. For the zoom lens 21, the CRA at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end needs to be consistent. Therefore, the arrangement of the third lens group G3 can ensure that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging quality.
可选的,所述第一透镜组中的透镜总数为2-3枚,即可以为2枚或3枚。Optionally, the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 2-3, that is, 2 or 3.
可选的,所述第二透镜组中的透镜总数为3-5枚,即可以为3枚或4枚或5枚。Optionally, the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 3-5, that is, 3, 4, or 5 lenses.
可选的,当变焦镜头21包含第三透镜组G3时,所述第三透镜组中的透镜总数为1-2枚,即可以为1枚或2枚。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 includes the third lens group G3, the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2, that is, 1 or 2.
需说明的是,对于一枚透镜而言,第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3中的每枚透镜可以为玻璃透镜或塑料透镜。每枚透镜可以具有正光焦度,也可以具有负光焦度。进一步的,透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面,透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面。上述三组透镜组中的每枚透镜的物侧面可以为球面、非球面等,同样,每枚透镜的像侧面可以为球面、非球面等。It should be noted that for one lens, each lens in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 can be a glass lens or a plastic lens. Each lens can have positive or negative power. Furthermore, the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side. The object side of each lens in the above three lens groups can be spherical, aspheric, etc., and similarly, the image side of each lens can be spherical, aspheric, etc.
可选的,请参照图7,所述变焦镜头21中至少有一枚透镜的临界点Q数量大于或等于2。换而言之,所述变焦镜头21包含至少一枚具有2个临界点Q或以上的透镜。其中,所述临界点Q是指透镜表面上,除与光轴X的交点外,与一垂直于光轴X的切面相切的切点。当透镜具有2个或以上的临界点Q时,透镜在径向方向上的形状变化将较为平缓,从而可以避免透镜的厚度过大,进而减小透镜在物侧指向像侧方向上的所占用空间,以使得变焦镜头21小型化,从而更有利于应用在具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上。Optionally, please refer to FIG. 7 . The number of critical points Q of at least one lens in the zoom lens 21 is greater than or equal to 2. In other words, the zoom lens 21 includes at least one lens with two critical points Q or above. The critical point Q refers to the tangent point on the lens surface that is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis X, in addition to the intersection point with the optical axis X. When a lens has two or more critical points Q, the shape change of the lens in the radial direction will be relatively gentle, which can prevent the lens from being too thick and reduce the space occupied by the lens in the direction from the object side to the image side. space, so that the zoom lens 21 can be miniaturized, which is more conducive to application in electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness.
可选的,请参照图4,所述变焦镜头21还包括第一承载件212和第二承载件213。所述第一承载件212可以套设于所述第二承载件213的外周。第一承载件212和第二承载件213均可沿光轴X方向相对运动。所述第一透镜组G1固定于第一承载件212内。所述第一承载件212用于带动第一透镜组G1沿光轴X相对感光元件23运动。第二透镜组G2固定于第二承载件213内。第二承载件213用于带动第二透镜组G2沿光轴X相对感光元件23运动。第一承载件212可以设于电子设备100的开口K14内,第一承载件212和第二承载件213可通过开口K14伸出或缩回电子设备100。当然,第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的承载形式还可以是其它方式,图4所示的结构仅是示例性说明,不应视为对本申请的限定。Optionally, please refer to FIG. 4 . The zoom lens 21 further includes a first bearing member 212 and a second bearing member 213 . The first bearing member 212 can be sleeved on the outer periphery of the second bearing member 213 . Both the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 can move relatively along the optical axis X direction. The first lens group G1 is fixed in the first carrier 212 . The first carrying member 212 is used to drive the first lens group G1 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 . The second lens group G2 is fixed in the second bearing member 213 . The second bearing member 213 is used to drive the second lens group G2 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 . The first bearing member 212 may be disposed in the opening K14 of the electronic device 100, and the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 may extend or retract the electronic device 100 through the opening K14. Of course, the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be carried in other ways. The structure shown in FIG. 4 is only an illustration and should not be regarded as a limitation of the present application.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7,其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7, where fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
fw/ImgH可以但不仅限于为1.1、1.2、1.3、1.32、1.4、1.5、1.6等。例如,fw为7mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者fw为8.5mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者fw为8.6mm,ImgH为6.45mm。fw/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.32, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, etc. For example, fw is 7mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.6mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
在本实施例中,将广角端焦距fw和像高ImgH的比值设定为大于1小于1.7,从而可以确保广角端的焦距在手机主摄的常用焦距范围之内。In this embodiment, the ratio of the wide-angle end focal length fw to the image height ImgH is set to be greater than 1 and less than 1.7, thereby ensuring that the wide-angle end focal length is within the common focal length range of the main camera of a mobile phone.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:-3<f1/f2<-1.2,其中,f1为所述第一透镜组的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组的焦距。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: -3<f1/f2<-1.2, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
f1/f2可以但不仅限于为-2.9、-2.8、-2.7、-2.6、-2.5、-2.4、-2.3、-2.2、-2.1、-2、-1.9、-1.8、-1.7、-1.6、-1.5、-1.4、-1.3等。例如,f1为-17.615mm,f2为8.495mm;或者f1为-13.251mm,f2为7.026mm;或者f1为-18.621mm,f2为8.523mm。f1/f2 can be but is not limited to -2.9, -2.8, -2.7, -2.6, -2.5, -2.4, -2.3, -2.2, -2.1, -2, -1.9, -1.8, -1.7, -1.6, -1.5, -1.4, -1.3, etc. For example, f1 is -17.615mm and f2 is 8.495mm; or f1 is -13.251mm and f2 is 7.026mm; or f1 is -18.621mm and f2 is 8.523mm.
在本实施例中,将第一透镜组G1的焦距f1和第二透镜组G2的焦距f2的比值设置为大于-3小于-1.2,因而可以合理分配第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的光焦度关系,更好地实现对焦与变焦。In this embodiment, the ratio of the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 to the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 is set to be greater than -3 and less than -1.2, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be reasonably allocated The optical power relationship enables better focusing and zooming.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25,其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头21在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第二透镜组G2移动的距离。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25, where Δd is the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end. The distance moved by the second lens group G2.
Δd/TTLw可以但不仅限于为0.06、0.07、0.08、0.09、0.1、0.11、0.12、0.13、0.14、0.15、0.16、0.17、0.18、0.19、0.2、0.21、0.22、0.23、0.24等。例如,Δd为1.705mm,TTLw为20mm;或者Δd为1.787mm,TTLw为23.378mm;或者Δd为1.831mm,TTLw为23.5mm。Δd/TTLw can be, but is not limited to, 0.06, 0.07, 0.08, 0.09, 0.1, 0.11, 0.12, 0.13, 0.14, 0.15, 0.16, 0.17, 0.18, 0.19, 0.2, 0.21, 0.22, 0.23, 0.24, etc. For example, Δd is 1.705mm and TTLw is 20mm; or Δd is 1.787mm and TTLw is 23.378mm; or Δd is 1.831mm and TTLw is 23.5mm.
在本实施例中,合理的将第二透镜组G2从广角端至望远端的移动距离与变焦镜头21的最大光学总长 TTLw的比值设置在0.05和0.25之间,使得能够以较小的镜组间隔变化量实现较大的变倍比,从而有利于压缩变焦镜头21的总长。In this embodiment, the ratio of the moving distance of the second lens group G2 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end and the maximum total optical length TTLw of the zoom lens 21 is reasonably set between 0.05 and 0.25, so that a smaller lens can be used. The change amount of the group interval achieves a larger zoom ratio, which is beneficial to compressing the total length of the zoom lens 21 .
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt),其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头21处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头21处于望远端时的半画角。其中,所述半画角是指视场角(Field of Vision,FOV)的一半。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw is the half-view angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is the zoom lens 21 Half-frame angle at telephoto end. Wherein, the half picture angle refers to half of the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV).
tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt)可以但不仅限于为1.6、1.71、1.8、1.9、2.0、2.1、2.2、2.25等。例如,hFOVw为52.806°,hFOVt为32.913°;或者hFOVw为43.738°,hFOVt为26.812°;或者hFOVw为43.935°,hFOVt为26.855°。tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt) may be, but is not limited to, 1.6, 1.71, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.25, etc. For example, hFOVw is 52.806° and hFOVt is 32.913°; or hFOVw is 43.738° and hFOVt is 26.812°; or hFOVw is 43.935° and hFOVt is 26.855°.
在本实施例中,通过将tan(hFOVw)与tan(hFOVt)的比值设置为大于1.5,从而使得变焦镜头21的变焦倍率在1.5倍以上。In this embodiment, by setting the ratio of tan(hFOVw) to tan(hFOVt) to be greater than 1.5, the zoom magnification of the zoom lens 21 is greater than 1.5 times.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式ft/ENPt<3,其中,ft为所述望远端的焦距,ENPt为所述变焦镜头21处于所述望远端时的入射瞳直径。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship ft/ENPt<3, where ft is the focal length of the telephoto end, and ENPt is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end.
ft/ENPt可以但不仅限于为2.9、2.8、2.7、2.6、2.5、2.4、2.3、2.2、2.1、2、1.9、1.8、1.7、1.6、1.5等。例如,ft为10.3mm,ENPt为4.256mm;或者ft为12.5mm,ENPt为5.208mm;或者ft为12.5mm,ENPt为5.208mm。ft/ENPt can be, but is not limited to, 2.9, 2.8, 2.7, 2.6, 2.5, 2.4, 2.3, 2.2, 2.1, 2, 1.9, 1.8, 1.7, 1.6, 1.5, etc. For example, ft is 10.3mm and ENPt is 4.256mm; or ft is 12.5mm and ENPt is 5.208mm; or ft is 12.5mm and ENPt is 5.208mm.
在本实施例中,通过将望远端焦距和望远端的入射瞳直径的比值设定为小于3,使得望远端的光圈在3以下,从而可以提高镜头的亮度和虚化效果。其中,镜头的亮度提高,进入镜头的光线量就越多,也即代表夜晚也能清晰成像。In this embodiment, by setting the ratio of the focal length of the telephoto end to the entrance pupil diameter of the telephoto end to less than 3, the aperture of the telephoto end is less than 3, thereby improving the brightness and blur effect of the lens. Among them, as the brightness of the lens increases, more light enters the lens, which means that clear images can be captured at night.
可选的,对于以上任意实施例中,所述变焦镜头21中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。透镜总数N可以为5、或6、或7、或8、或9、或10。例如,第一透镜组G1中的透镜总数为2枚,第二透镜组G2中的透镜总数为4枚,第三透镜组G3中的透镜总数为0枚。或者,第一透镜组G1中的透镜总数为2枚,第二透镜组G2中的透镜总数为4枚,第三透镜组G3中的透镜总数为2枚。Optionally, for any of the above embodiments, the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens 21 satisfies: 5≤N≤10. The total number of lenses N may be 5, or 6, or 7, or 8, or 9, or 10. For example, the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 2, the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 4, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 0. Alternatively, the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 2, the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 4, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 2.
当变焦透镜中的透镜数目越多时,所述变焦镜头21的成像效果越好。当变焦透镜中的透镜数目越少时,成本更低,最小光学总长cTTL更小。当透镜总数N小于5时,成像品质不能保证;当透镜总数N大于10时,变焦镜头21的光学总长太大,不适于应用在具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上。本申请实施例兼顾成像品质和光学总长而将透镜总数选取为5至10之间,从而可以确保变焦镜头21具有较好成像效果的同时又能实现变焦镜头21小型化的有益效果。When the number of lenses in the zoom lens is greater, the imaging effect of the zoom lens 21 is better. When the number of lenses in a zoom lens is smaller, the cost is lower and the minimum total optical length cTTL is smaller. When the total number of lenses N is less than 5, the imaging quality cannot be guaranteed; when the total number of lenses N is greater than 10, the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 is too large and is not suitable for application in the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness. In the embodiment of the present application, the total number of lenses is selected between 5 and 10 by taking both imaging quality and total optical length into consideration, thereby ensuring that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging effects and at the same time achieving the beneficial effect of miniaturization of the zoom lens 21 .
应用本申请提供的变焦镜头21,变焦镜头21的最大光学总长TTLw可控制在26mm以下(比如20mm)。变焦镜头21最小光学总长cTTL可控制在11mm以下(比如10mm)。广角端的视场角可实现在90度以下(比如85度)。望远端的视场角可实现小于52度。因此,本申请提供的变焦镜头21不仅可以很好的适应于具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上,同时又兼备很好的拍摄性能。Using the zoom lens 21 provided by this application, the maximum total optical length TTLw of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 26 mm (for example, 20 mm). The minimum total optical length cTTL of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 11 mm (for example, 10 mm). The field of view at the wide-angle end can be below 90 degrees (such as 85 degrees). The field of view angle at the telephoto end can be less than 52 degrees. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can not only be well adapted to the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness, but also has good shooting performance.
以下通过三组具体的实施例对本申请提供的变焦镜头21做更进一步的说明。在以下各实施例中,各非球面计算公式为:The zoom lens 21 provided by this application will be further described below through three sets of specific embodiments. In the following embodiments, the calculation formula of each aspheric surface is:
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000001
其中,x为非球面沿光轴方向在高度为h的位置时,距非球面顶点的距离矢高;c为非球面的近轴曲率,c=1/R(即,近轴曲率c为以下表格中曲率半径R的倒数);k为圆锥系数(请参见表格);Ai为第i阶非球面系数。Among them, x is the distance sagittal height from the aspherical surface vertex when the aspherical surface is at a height h along the optical axis; c is the paraxial curvature of the aspherical surface, c=1/R (that is, the paraxial curvature c is the following table The reciprocal of the radius of curvature R); k is the cone coefficient (see table); Ai is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
实施例1Example 1
请参照图5和图6,其中,图6(a)为图5所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图6(b)为图5所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6。第三透镜组G3包括第七透镜L7。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3之间。Please refer to FIGS. 5 and 6 , wherein FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 5 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
关于实施例1提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表1至表5。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1, please refer to Tables 1 to 5.
表1为实施例1中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表1中,表面序号1-19为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 1 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1, including the radius of curvature R, the distance d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 1, surface numbers 1-19 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the photographed object, each lens, aperture, filter, and imaging surface in sequence. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
需说明的是,间隔d代表当前表面与后一表面沿光轴的间隔距离为d。例如,表1中的表面2与表面3的间隔为0.6,表面3与表面4的间隔为1.261。后文涉及到间隔d的地方请参考此处的解释。It should be noted that the interval d represents the distance d between the current surface and the subsequent surface along the optical axis. For example, the distance between surface 2 and surface 3 in Table 1 is 0.6, and the distance between surface 3 and surface 4 is 1.261. Please refer to the explanation here when the interval d is mentioned later.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000002
表2为实施例1中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 2 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 1, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000003
表3为实施例1中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表3包括表3a、表3b、表3c、表3d。Table 3 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 1. Table 3 includes Table 3a, Table 3b, Table 3c, and Table 3d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000009
表4为实施例1中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 4 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 1.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000010
表5为实施例1中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 5 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000011
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第二透镜L2的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第六透镜L6的像侧面至第七透镜L7的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图8至图10,图8至图10示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 8 to 10 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图8为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 8 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图9为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 9 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图10为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 10 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图11至图13,图11至图13示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 11 to 13 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图11为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 11 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Embodiment 1 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图12为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 12 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图13为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 13 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图8至图13可以看出,实施例1所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 8 to 13 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例2Example 2
请参照图14和图15,其中,图15(a)为图14所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图15(b)为图14所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6。第三透镜组G3包括第七透镜L7。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3之间。Please refer to FIGS. 14 and 15 , wherein FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 14 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
关于实施例2提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表6至表10。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2, please refer to Tables 6 to 10.
表6为实施例2中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表6中,表面序号1-19为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 6 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 2, including the radius of curvature R, the distance d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 6, surface numbers 1-19 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the photographed object, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000012
表7为实施例2中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 7 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 2, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000013
表8为实施例2中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表8包括表8a、表8b、表8c、表8d。Table 8 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 2. Table 8 includes Table 8a, Table 8b, Table 8c, and Table 8d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000016
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000018
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000019
表9为实施例2中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 9 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000020
表10为实施例2中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 10 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 2. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000021
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000022
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第二透镜L2的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第六透镜L6的像侧面至第七透镜L7的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图16至图18,图16至图18示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 16 to 18 , which illustrate relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图16为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 16 is an astigmatism curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图17为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 17 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图18为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 18 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图19至图21,图19至图21示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 19 to 21 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图19为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 19 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图20为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 20 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图21为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 21 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图16至图21可以看出,实施例2所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 16 to 21 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例3Example 3
请参照图22和图23,其中,图23(a)为图22所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图23(b)为图22所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6。第三透镜组G3包括第七透镜L7。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3之间。Please refer to FIGS. 22 and 23 , wherein FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 22 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
关于实施例3提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表11至表15。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3, please refer to Table 11 to Table 15.
表11为实施例3中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表11中,表面序号1-19为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 11 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 3, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 11, surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, aperture, filter, and imaging surface in sequence from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000024
表12为实施例3中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 12 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 3, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000025
表13为实施例3中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表13包括表13a、表13b、表13c、表13d。Table 13 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 3. Table 13 includes Table 13a, Table 13b, Table 13c, and Table 13d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000028
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000030
表14为实施例3中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 14 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000032
表15为实施例3中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 15 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 3. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000033
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第二透镜L2的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第六透镜L6的像侧面至第七透镜L7的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图24至图26,图24至图26示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 24 to 26 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图24为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 24 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图25为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 25 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图26为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 26 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图27至图29,图27至图29示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 27 to 29 , which show relevant curves at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图27为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 27 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图28为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 28 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图29为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 29 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图24至图29可以看出,实施例3所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 24 to 29 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例4Example 4
请参照图30和图31,其中,图31(a)为图30所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图31(b)为图30所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6。第三透镜组G3包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第七透镜L7、第八透镜L8。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第二透镜L2和第三透镜L3之间。Please refer to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 , wherein FIG. 31(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 31(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 30 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1 and a second lens L2 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a third lens L3, a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, and a sixth lens L6 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes a seventh lens L7 and an eighth lens L8 arranged from the object side to the image side. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the second lens L2 and the third lens L3.
关于实施例4提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表16至表20。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 4, please refer to Table 16 to Table 20.
表16为实施例4中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表16中,表面序号1-21为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 16 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 4, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 16, surface numbers 1-21 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000035
表17为实施例4中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 17 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 4, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000036
表18为实施例4中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表18包括表18a、表18b、表18c、表18d。Table 18 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 4. Table 18 includes Table 18a, Table 18b, Table 18c, and Table 18d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000039
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000039
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000041
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000041
表19为实施例4中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 19 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 4.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000042
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000042
表20为实施例4中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 20 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 4. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000043
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000043
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第二透镜L2的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第六透镜L6的像侧面至第七透镜L7的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the second lens L2 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the sixth lens L6 to the object side of the seventh lens L7 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图32至图34,图32至图34示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 32 to 34 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图32为实施例4中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 32 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 4 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图33为实施例4中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 33 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图34为实施例4中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 34 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图35至图37,图35至图37示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 35 to 37 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图35为实施例4中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 35 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 4 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图36为实施例4中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm, 实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 36 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end. In the figure, the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图37为实施例4中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 37 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 4 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图32至图37可以看出,实施例4所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 32 to 37 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 4 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例5Example 5
请参照图38和图39,其中,图39(a)为图38所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图39(b)为图38所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7。第三透镜组G3包括第八透镜L8。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4之间。Please refer to FIGS. 38 and 39 , wherein FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 39(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 38 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. Among them, the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
关于实施例5提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表21至表25。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 5, please refer to Table 21 to Table 25.
表21为实施例5中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表21中,表面序号1-21为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 21 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 5, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 21, surface numbers 1-21 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000044
表22为实施例5中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 22 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 5, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000045
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000045
表23为实施例5中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表23包括表23a、表23b、表23c、表23d。Table 23 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 5. Table 23 includes Table 23a, Table 23b, Table 23c, and Table 23d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000046
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000046
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000047
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000047
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000048
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000048
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000049
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000049
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000050
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000050
表24为实施例5中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 24 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 5.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000051
表25为实施例5中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 25 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 5. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000052
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000052
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000053
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000053
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第三透镜L3的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第七透镜L7的像侧面至第八透镜L8的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the third lens L3 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the eighth lens L8 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图40至图42,图40至图42示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 40 to 42 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图40为实施例5中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 40 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 5 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图41为实施例5中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 41 is the axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图42为实施例5中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 42 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图43至图45,图43至图45示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 43 to 45 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图43为实施例5中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 43 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 5 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图44为实施例5中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 44 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图45为实施例5中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 45 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 5 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图40至图45可以看出,实施例5所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 40 to 45 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 5 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例6Example 6
请参照图46和图47,其中,图47(a)为图46所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图47(b)为图46所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第四透镜L4、第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7。第三透镜组G3包括第八透镜L8。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4之间。Please refer to FIGS. 46 and 47 , wherein FIG. 47(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 46 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. Among them, the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, and a third lens L3 arranged from the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a fourth lens L4, a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
关于实施例6提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表26至表30。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 6, please refer to Table 26 to Table 30.
表26为实施例6中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表26中,表面序号1-21为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 26 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 6, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 26, surface numbers 1-21 mark the surfaces of the photographed object, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000054
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000054
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000055
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000055
表27为实施例6中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 27 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 6, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000056
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000056
表28为实施例6中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表28包括表28a、表28b、表28c、表28d、表28e。Table 28 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 6. Table 28 includes Table 28a, Table 28b, Table 28c, Table 28d, and Table 28e.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000057
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000058
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000058
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000059
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000059
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000060
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000060
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000061
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000061
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000062
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000063
表29为实施例6中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 29 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 6.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000064
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000064
表30为实施例6中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 30 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 6. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000065
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000065
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和光阑211沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第三透镜L3的像侧面和光阑211在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第七透镜L7的像侧面至第八透镜L8的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance between the image side of the third lens L3 and the diaphragm 211 along the optical axis The distance d2 between the lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the distance from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the eighth lens L8 along the optical axis Switch between far end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图48至图50,图48至图50示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 48 to 50 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图48为实施例6中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 48 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 6 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图49为实施例6中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 49 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图50为实施例6中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 50 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图51至图53,图51至图53示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 51 to 53 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图51为实施例6中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 51 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 6 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图52为实施例6中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 52 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图53为实施例6中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 53 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 6 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图48至图53可以看出,实施例6所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 48 to 53 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 6 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
以上即为关于第一部分的内容,下面结合附图具体介绍第二部分。The above is the content of the first part. The second part will be introduced in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
第二部分(对应参照图54至图83)Part 2 (corresponding to Figure 54 to Figure 83)
请参照图54至图56,本申请提供一种电子设备100,所述电子设备100包括设备本体1及摄像头模组2。所述设备本体1具有开口K14,所述摄像头模组2对应所述开口K14设置在所述设备本体1内。所述摄像头模组2的变焦镜头21至少部分可通过所述开口K14伸出或缩回所述设备本体1。当用户需要拍摄时,可控制变焦镜头21通过开口K14伸出于设备本体1(如图55所示)。当用户不需要拍摄时,可控制变焦镜头21通过开口K14缩回于设备本体1内(如图54所示)。Please refer to Figures 54 to 56. This application provides an electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 includes a device body 1 and a camera module 2. The device body 1 has an opening K14, and the camera module 2 is arranged in the device body 1 corresponding to the opening K14. The zoom lens 21 of the camera module 2 can at least partially extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14. When the user needs to take pictures, the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to extend from the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in Figure 55). When the user does not need to take pictures, the zoom lens 21 can be controlled to retract into the device body 1 through the opening K14 (as shown in Figure 54).
其中,所述电子设备100可以是手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、可穿戴设备(如智能手表、手环、VR设备等)、电视机、电子阅读器等设备。The electronic device 100 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, a wearable device (such as a smart watch, a bracelet, a VR device, etc.), a television, an e-reader and other devices.
所述设备本体1是指电子设备100的主体部分,主体部分包括实现电子设备100主要功能的电子组件以及保护、承载这些电子组件的壳体。设备本体1可以包括显示屏11、中框12、后盖13(如图56所示),显示屏11和后盖13均连接于中框12,且设置于中框12的相背两侧,且中框12的侧面显露于后盖13与显示屏11之外。The device body 1 refers to the main part of the electronic device 100. The main part includes electronic components that realize the main functions of the electronic device 100 and a housing that protects and carries these electronic components. The device body 1 may include a display screen 11, a middle frame 12, and a back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 56). The display screen 11 and the back cover 13 are both connected to the middle frame 12 and are arranged on opposite sides of the middle frame 12. And the sides of the middle frame 12 are exposed outside the back cover 13 and the display screen 11 .
需说明的是,根据实际需求,摄像头模组2可以设置于电子设备100的任意一侧,本申请对此不作限定。以手机为例,所述摄像头模组2可以设置于手机的正面、背面、侧面。其中,所谓正面是指手机具备显示屏11的一侧;所谓背面是指手机具备后盖13的一侧(如图56所示);所谓侧面是指手机的中框12的环周侧。可以理解的是,电子设备100的类型不同,其正面、背面、侧面等称呼的定义可能不同,对于其它类型的电子设备100在此不一一详述。It should be noted that, according to actual needs, the camera module 2 can be disposed on any side of the electronic device 100, which is not limited in this application. Taking a mobile phone as an example, the camera module 2 can be installed on the front, back, or side of the mobile phone. The so-called front refers to the side of the mobile phone with the display screen 11; the so-called back refers to the side of the mobile phone with the back cover 13 (as shown in FIG. 56); and the so-called side refers to the circumferential side of the middle frame 12 of the mobile phone. It can be understood that, depending on the type of electronic device 100 , the definitions of the front, back, side, etc. may be different, and other types of electronic devices 100 will not be described in detail here.
进一步的,所述开口K14可开设在所述后盖13上(如图56所示)。在其他实施方式中,所述开口K14也可开设在所述显示屏11上;或者,所述开口K14开设在所述中框12上。当所述后盖13具有所述开口K14时,所述摄像头模组2为后置摄像头。当所述显示屏11上具有所述开口K14时,所述摄像模组为前置摄像头。可以理解的是,本实施方式中对所述设备本体1的介绍仅仅是所述摄像头模组2的一种应用场景的介绍,不应当理解为对本申请所提供的电子设备100的限定。Further, the opening K14 may be opened on the back cover 13 (as shown in Figure 56). In other embodiments, the opening K14 may also be provided on the display screen 11 ; or, the opening K14 may be provided on the middle frame 12 . When the back cover 13 has the opening K14, the camera module 2 is a rear camera. When the opening K14 is provided on the display screen 11, the camera module is a front camera. It can be understood that the introduction of the device body 1 in this embodiment is only an introduction to an application scenario of the camera module 2 and should not be understood as a limitation of the electronic device 100 provided in this application.
在相关技术中,随着人们对于具备拍摄功能的电子设备的成像质量的追求越来越高,比如,高画质、高像素,通常需要将摄像头模组中的感光元件以及镜头进行设计。比如,采用大底的感光元件,由于感光元件与镜头之间的距离不可调,因此,需要对应将镜头和感光元件之间的距离设计得较长。在视场角(Field of Vision,FOV)基本不变的情况下,镜头和感光元件之间的距离较长,意味着摄像头模组的总长也会较长。当摄像头模组应用于电子设备中时,带来的结果就是会使得电子设备机身越来越厚,不利于电子设备的轻薄化。换言之,对于轻薄化的电子设备而言,由于电子设备的厚度限制,摄像头模组的长度也会受限。而当摄像头模组的厚度受限时,由于感光元件与镜头之间的距离不可调,会导致摄镜头模组中的镜头到感光元件之间的距离受限。若设计摄镜头模组的厚度较厚,电子设备的厚度较薄,可能导致摄像头模组在电子设备的后盖上形成较厚的凸起。因此,相关技术中的摄像头模组应用于电子设备时无法实现电子设备的轻薄化和摄像头模组的高成像质量的兼容性。In related technologies, as people pursue higher and higher imaging quality of electronic devices with shooting functions, such as high image quality and high pixels, it is usually necessary to design the photosensitive elements and lenses in the camera module. For example, if a sensor with an outsole is used, since the distance between the sensor and the lens cannot be adjusted, the distance between the lens and the sensor needs to be designed to be longer. When the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV) is basically unchanged, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element is longer, which means that the total length of the camera module will also be longer. When camera modules are used in electronic devices, the result is that the body of the electronic device will become thicker and thicker, which is not conducive to the thinning of the electronic device. In other words, for thin and light electronic devices, the length of the camera module will also be limited due to the thickness limitation of the electronic device. When the thickness of the camera module is limited, since the distance between the photosensitive element and the lens is not adjustable, the distance between the lens and the photosensitive element in the camera module will be limited. If the camera module is designed to be thicker and the electronic device is thinner, it may cause the camera module to form a thicker bulge on the back cover of the electronic device. Therefore, when the camera module in the related art is applied to an electronic device, it is impossible to achieve the compatibility of thinning and lightness of the electronic device and high imaging quality of the camera module.
在本申请实施例提供的电子设备100中,由于变焦镜头21可通过开口K14实现伸出或缩回设备本体1,从而可实现摄像头模组2具有较大焦距的同时,又不会影响电子设备100的厚度,进而解决电子设备100的轻薄化和摄像头模组2的高成像质量的不能兼容的问题。In the electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application, since the zoom lens 21 can extend or retract the device body 1 through the opening K14, the camera module 2 can have a larger focal length without affecting the electronic device. The thickness of the electronic device 100 is 100, thereby solving the problem of incompatibility between the thinness and lightness of the electronic device 100 and the high imaging quality of the camera module 2 .
请参照图57,本申请还提供一种摄像头模组2,所述摄像头模组2包括滤光片22、感光元件23及以下任意实施方式中所描述的变焦镜头21。所述变焦镜头21、滤光片22、感光元件23沿光轴X方向依次排布。在进行拍摄时,外界光线依次经过变焦镜头21、滤光片22,最后到达感光元件23。所述变焦镜头21的第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2可沿光轴X方向相对所述感光元件23运动。Please refer to Figure 57. This application also provides a camera module 2. The camera module 2 includes a filter 22, a photosensitive element 23 and a zoom lens 21 described in any of the following embodiments. The zoom lens 21, the filter 22, and the photosensitive element 23 are arranged in sequence along the optical axis X direction. When shooting, the external light passes through the zoom lens 21 and the filter 22 in sequence, and finally reaches the photosensitive element 23 . The first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 of the zoom lens 21 can move relative to the photosensitive element 23 along the optical axis X direction.
其中,所述变焦镜头21用于收集被摄景物的光线,并将光线聚焦于感光元件23。所述滤光片22用于消除不必要的光线,以提高有效分辨率和彩色还原性。所述滤光片22可以但不仅限于为红外滤光片22。所述感光元件23(Sensor)也称为感光芯片或图像传感器,其用于接收穿过滤光片22的光线,并将光信号转换为电信号。感光元件23可以是电荷耦合器件(Charge Coupled Device,CCD),也可以是互补金属氧化物导体器件(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor,CMOS)。感光元件23具有成像面S231,所述成像面S231为感光元件23上接收光线的靶面。The zoom lens 21 is used to collect light from the photographed scene and focus the light on the photosensitive element 23 . The filter 22 is used to eliminate unnecessary light to improve effective resolution and color reproduction. The filter 22 may be, but is not limited to, an infrared filter 22 . The photosensitive element 23 (Sensor) is also called a photosensitive chip or an image sensor, and is used to receive light passing through the filter 22 and convert the optical signal into an electrical signal. The photosensitive element 23 may be a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) or a Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS). The photosensitive element 23 has an imaging surface S231, and the imaging surface S231 is a target surface on the photosensitive element 23 that receives light.
需说明的是,以下关于变焦镜头21的实施例中所涉及到的成像面S231、滤光片22,是用于辅助描述第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的位置情况等,并非是指变焦镜头21包含具有成像面S231的感光元件23以及滤光片22。It should be noted that the imaging surface S231 and the optical filter 22 involved in the following embodiments of the zoom lens 21 are used to assist in describing the positions and conditions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2, and are not The zoom lens 21 includes a photosensitive element 23 having an imaging surface S231 and a filter 22 .
下面结合附图详细介绍上述摄像头模组2中的变焦镜头21。The zoom lens 21 in the above-mentioned camera module 2 will be introduced in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
请参照图57,本申请还提供一种变焦镜头21,所述变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2。其中,物侧和像侧分别是指:以变焦镜头21为界,被摄物体所在的一侧为物侧,被摄物体形成的图像所在的一侧为像侧。因此,在进行拍摄时,光线首先经过更靠近物侧的第一透镜组G1,再经过更靠近像侧的第二透镜组G2。Referring to Figure 57, the present application also provides a zoom lens 21. The zoom lens 21 includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side. The object side and the image side respectively refer to: taking the zoom lens 21 as a boundary, the side where the subject is located is the object side, and the side where the image formed by the subject is located is the image side. Therefore, when shooting, light first passes through the first lens group G1 closer to the object side, and then passes through the second lens group G2 closer to the image side.
所述第一透镜组G1具有正光焦度。所述第二透镜组G2具有负光焦度。其中,所述光焦度(focal power)表征光学系统(透镜或透镜组)偏折光线的能力。一般而言,光焦度也为像方焦距的倒数。光学系统的光焦度为正,表示其对光线有汇聚作用。光学系统的光焦度为负,表示其对光线有发散作用。The first lens group G1 has positive optical power. The second lens group G2 has negative refractive power. Wherein, the optical power (focal power) represents the ability of the optical system (lens or lens group) to deflect light. Generally speaking, optical power is also the reciprocal of the image-side focal length. The optical power of an optical system is positive, which means it has a converging effect on light. The power of an optical system is negative, which means it diffuses light.
第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2均用于通过移动实现变焦,因而都可称之为变焦透镜组。The first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are both used to achieve zooming through movement, so they can both be called zoom lens groups.
第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2两者中的任意一个为补偿透镜组。也就是说,第一透镜组G1为补偿透镜组,或者,第二透镜组G2为补偿透镜组。其中,所谓的补偿透镜组是指用于补偿像面位置,以使不同距离的被拍摄物的焦点落于成像面S231上的透镜组。Either one of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. That is to say, the first lens group G1 is a compensation lens group, or the second lens group G2 is a compensation lens group. The so-called compensation lens group refers to a lens group used to compensate the position of the image plane so that the focus of objects photographed at different distances falls on the imaging plane S231.
可选的,所述第一透镜组G1最像侧的透镜具有正光焦度。如此设置可使变焦镜头21提供更好的成像效果。其中,所谓最像侧的透镜是指第一透镜组G1中最靠近像侧的那一枚透镜。Optionally, the lens on the most image side of the first lens group G1 has positive refractive power. Such an arrangement allows the zoom lens 21 to provide better imaging effects. The so-called lens on the most image side refers to the lens closest to the image side in the first lens group G1.
请参照图58,所述变焦镜头21具有望远端和广角端。所述第一透镜组G1和所述第二透镜组G2均可沿光轴X方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换。其中,望远端是指所述变焦镜头21的焦距最大时的状态,望远端也可称之为望远状态。广角端是指所述变焦镜头21的焦距最小时的状态,广角端也可称之为广角状态。变焦镜头21处于望远端时第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的所处位置不同于变焦镜头21处于广角端时第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的位置。因此,望远端和广角端为变焦镜头21的两种不同的拍摄状态,其中,望远端用于望远拍摄,广角端用于广角拍摄。Referring to Figure 58, the zoom lens 21 has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction to zoom switch between the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. The telephoto end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is maximum, and the telephoto end can also be called the telephoto state. The wide-angle end refers to the state when the focal length of the zoom lens 21 is the smallest, and the wide-angle end can also be called the wide-angle state. The positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end are different from the positions of the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end. Therefore, the telephoto end and the wide-angle end are two different shooting states of the zoom lens 21 , where the telephoto end is used for telephoto shooting and the wide-angle end is used for wide-angle shooting.
相关技术中,手机上至少搭载了三个镜头,包括望远镜头、主摄镜头、超广角镜头。其中,望远镜头用于望远拍摄,主摄像头和超广角镜头都用于广角拍摄,且主摄像头的视场角小于超广角镜头的视场角。然而,该设计形式首先会导致整个摄像头模组的体积较大,也会增加产品成本,此外,由于不同用途的镜头分开独立设置,导致每个镜头仅能搭配小底的感光元件,从而影响成像质量。In related technology, mobile phones are equipped with at least three lenses, including a telephoto lens, a main camera lens, and an ultra-wide-angle lens. Among them, the telephoto lens is used for telephoto shooting, and the main camera and ultra-wide-angle lens are both used for wide-angle shooting, and the field of view of the main camera is smaller than that of the ultra-wide-angle lens. However, this design will first make the entire camera module larger and increase the product cost. In addition, since the lenses for different purposes are set up independently, each lens can only be equipped with a small sensor element, thus affecting the imaging. quality.
在本申请实施例提供的变焦镜头21中,由于第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2均可沿光轴X方向移动,因而可通过移动第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2来实现变焦镜头21在望远端和广角端之间变焦切换。相较于相关技术而言,本实施例提供的变焦镜头21相当于将望远镜头和主摄镜头一体化,从而可以减小模组体积,降低成本,并且可搭配大底的感光元件23(比如采用1/1.28inch的感光元件23),实现从广角端到望远端的5000万像素成像,从而提高成像质量(比如实现高像素拍摄、降低信噪比)。In the zoom lens 21 provided in the embodiment of the present application, since both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can move along the optical axis X direction, this can be achieved by moving the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 The zoom lens 21 zooms and switches between a telephoto end and a wide-angle end. Compared with related technologies, the zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment is equivalent to integrating the telephoto lens and the main camera lens, thereby reducing the module volume and cost, and can be matched with the outsole photosensitive element 23 (such as Using a 1/1.28-inch photosensitive element 23), it can achieve 50-megapixel imaging from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, thereby improving imaging quality (such as achieving high-pixel shooting and reducing the signal-to-noise ratio).
可选的,所述变焦镜头21的望远端满足关系式:1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6。其中,TTLt为所述变焦镜头21处于所述望远端时的光学总长。ImgH为像高,所述像高是指成像面S231有效像素区域对角线长的一半。需说明的是,所述光学总长是指第一透镜组G1最靠近物侧的表面至成像面S231的距离,以下涉及到光学总长的描述请参考此处。Optionally, the telephoto end of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6. Wherein, TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the telephoto end. ImgH is the image height, which refers to half of the diagonal length of the effective pixel area of the imaging plane S231. It should be noted that the total optical length refers to the distance from the surface of the first lens group G1 closest to the object side to the imaging surface S231. Please refer to here for the following description of the total optical length.
所述TTLt/ImgH可以为但不限于为1.9、2.0、2.1、2.2、2.3、2.33、2.5、2.7、2.8、2.81、2.9、3.0、3.2、3.3等。例如,TTLt为16.518mm,ImgH为6.450mm;或者TTLt为17.873mm,ImgH为6.450mm;或者TTLt为15.268mm,ImgH为6.450mm。The TTLt/ImgH may be, but is not limited to, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.33, 2.5, 2.7, 2.8, 2.81, 2.9, 3.0, 3.2, 3.3, etc. For example, TTLt is 16.518mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 17.873mm and ImgH is 6.450mm; or TTLt is 15.268mm and ImgH is 6.450mm.
由于变焦镜头21满足上述关系式,使得变焦镜头21不仅得以小型化,还可以有效的保持良好的光学性能。可以理解的是,小型化的变焦镜头21更适用于有轻薄化要求的电子设备100,比如手机。Since the zoom lens 21 satisfies the above relational expression, the zoom lens 21 can not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance. It can be understood that the miniaturized zoom lens 21 is more suitable for electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness, such as mobile phones.
在相关技术中,手机等具有轻薄化要求的电子设备上已应用可变焦的摄像头模组。具体来讲,由于变焦功能要求摄像头模组内的透镜可相对感光元件移动,因此,摄像头模组的总长度必然较长,一般而言大于电子设备的厚度。为了避免电子设备过厚,目前通常采用潜望式摄像头,且将潜望式摄像头的长度方向 顺应电子设备的宽度方向(或长度方向)进行布置,即潜望式摄像头的长度方向与电子设备的厚度方向垂直设置。潜望式摄像头中设有棱镜,该棱镜用于接收并反射外界光线,以使反射后的光线沿潜望式摄像头的长度方向进行传播。然而,潜望式摄像头适用于望远拍摄,而不适用于广角拍摄,因为广角拍摄要求摄像头具有大的视场角,视场角增大,棱镜的厚度也将变大,进而不能满足电子设备的厚度。而且,光圈、周边亮度等规格也会受到棱镜的厚度的限制。In related technologies, zoomable camera modules have been applied to electronic devices such as mobile phones that have thinning and lightness requirements. Specifically, since the zoom function requires the lens in the camera module to move relative to the photosensitive element, the total length of the camera module must be longer, which is generally greater than the thickness of the electronic device. In order to prevent electronic devices from being too thick, periscope cameras are usually used, and the length direction of the periscope camera is arranged in accordance with the width direction (or length direction) of the electronic device, that is, the length direction of the periscope camera is in line with the length direction of the electronic device. The thickness direction is set vertically. The periscope camera is provided with a prism, which is used to receive and reflect external light so that the reflected light propagates along the length of the periscope camera. However, periscope cameras are suitable for telephoto shooting, but not for wide-angle shooting, because wide-angle shooting requires the camera to have a large field of view. As the field of view increases, the thickness of the prism will also increase, which cannot satisfy electronic equipment. thickness of. Furthermore, specifications such as aperture and peripheral brightness are also limited by the thickness of the prism.
在本申请中,当变焦镜头21应用于电子设备100时,变焦镜头21可通过设备本体1上的开口K14伸出或缩回,使得第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2相对感光元件23运动,从而实现变焦。在该结构形式中不涉及棱镜,从而不会产生上述棱镜所带来的技术问题。因此,本申请提供的变焦镜头21可以提升成像质量。In this application, when the zoom lens 21 is applied to the electronic device 100, the zoom lens 21 can be extended or retracted through the opening K14 on the device body 1, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are opposite to the photosensitive element 23 movement to achieve zoom. This structural form does not involve prisms, so the technical problems caused by the above-mentioned prisms will not arise. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by this application can improve imaging quality.
请参照图57,所述变焦镜头21还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt。其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLw为所述变焦镜头21处于所述广角端时的光学总长。TTLt为所述变焦镜头21处于所述望远端时的光学总长。换而言之,在上述三种状态中,当变焦镜头21处于收缩状态时的光学总长cTTL最短,小于望远端和广角端对应的光学总长,因而cTTL为变焦镜头21的最小全长。因此,当用户需要拍摄时,则可以控制变焦镜头21伸长,以切换到广角端或望远端,当不需要拍摄时,则控制变焦镜头21缩短,以切换到收缩状态。结合前面实施例提供的电子设备100来讲,当变焦镜头21伸长以切换到广角端或望远端时,则通过开口K14伸出于电子设备100之外;当变焦镜头21缩短以切换到收缩状态时,变焦镜头21则缩回于电子设备100内。Please refer to FIG. 57 . The zoom lens 21 also has a retracted state. When the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, the relational expressions are satisfied: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt. Wherein, cTTL is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, and TTLw is the total optical length when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end. TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is at the telephoto end. In other words, among the above three states, the total optical length cTTL when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state is the shortest, which is smaller than the total optical length corresponding to the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Therefore, cTTL is the minimum total length of the zoom lens 21 . Therefore, when the user needs to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to extend to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end. When the user does not need to take pictures, the user can control the zoom lens 21 to shorten to switch to the contracted state. With reference to the electronic device 100 provided in the previous embodiment, when the zoom lens 21 is extended to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, it extends out of the electronic device 100 through the opening K14; when the zoom lens 21 is shortened to switch to the wide-angle end or the telephoto end, In the retracted state, the zoom lens 21 is retracted into the electronic device 100 .
进一步的,变焦镜头21满足:cTTL<TTLw<TTLt;也就是说,当变焦镜头21处于望远端时的光学总长TTLt大于变焦镜头21处于广角端时的光学总长TTLw,因而TTLt为变焦镜头21的最大全长。从变焦的角度来讲,所述变焦镜头21从所述收缩状态切换至所述广角端的过程中,所述第一透镜组G1沿光轴X往物侧方向移动(请参照图57和图58)。所述变焦镜头21从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组G1沿光轴X向物侧移动,所述第二透镜组G2沿光轴X向物侧移动(请参照图58)。需说明的是,变焦镜头21从收缩状态切换至广角端的过程中,第二透镜组G2可以不动,也可以沿光轴X往物侧方向移动。Furthermore, the zoom lens 21 satisfies: cTTL<TTLw<TTLt; that is to say, the total optical length TTLt when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end is greater than the total optical length TTLw when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, so TTLt is the zoom lens 21 the maximum total length. From a zoom perspective, when the zoom lens 21 switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X (please refer to Figures 57 and 58 ). During the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X, and the second lens group G2 moves toward the object side along the optical axis X. Move sideways (please refer to Figure 58). It should be noted that when the zoom lens 21 switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the second lens group G2 may not move, or may move toward the object side along the optical axis X.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头21处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。Optionally, the contracted state of the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2. Wherein, cTTL is the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 when it is in the contracted state, and ImgH is the image height.
其中,cTTL/ImgH可以但不仅限于为1.1、1.2、1.24、1.3、1.4、1.5、1.55、1.6、1.7、1.8、1.9等。例如,cTTL为9mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者cTTL为10mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者cTTL为8.5mm,ImgH为6.45mm。Among them, cTTL/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.24, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.55, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, etc. For example, cTTL is 9mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 10mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or cTTL is 8.5mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
由以上例举的数据可知,当ImgH的取值为6.45mm时,TTLt在20mm左右,cTTL在10mm左右,因此本申请提供的变焦镜头21可适用于具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上,比如手机。这使得变焦镜头21不仅得以小型化,还可以有效的保持良好的光学性能。It can be seen from the data exemplified above that when the value of ImgH is 6.45mm, TTLt is about 20mm and cTTL is about 10mm. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can be applied to electronic devices 100 with thinning and lightness requirements, such as cell phone. This allows the zoom lens 21 to not only be miniaturized, but also effectively maintain good optical performance.
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于收缩状态时,第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2都位于设备本体1内。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is in the retracted state, both the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 are located in the device body 1 .
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于广角端时,第一透镜组G1至少部分位于设备本体1外。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, the first lens group G1 is at least partially located outside the device body 1 .
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于广角端时,第二透镜组G2至少部分位于设备本体1内。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, the second lens group G2 is at least partially located within the device body 1 .
可选的,当变焦镜头21处于望远端时,第一透镜组G1位于设备本体1外,第二透镜组G2至少部分位于设备本体1外。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end, the first lens group G1 is located outside the device body 1 , and the second lens group G2 is at least partially located outside the device body 1 .
请参照图57,所述变焦镜头21还包括光阑211。所述光阑211设置于所述第一透镜组G1的物侧或者所述第一透镜组G1的内部或者所述第一透镜组G1的像侧。所述变焦镜头21在变焦过程中,所述光阑211跟随所述第一透镜组G1移动。换而言之,光阑211可以设置在第一透镜组G1的物侧或者像侧,也可以设置在组成第一透镜组G1的两枚相邻的透镜之间。光阑211与第一透镜组G1相对固定,在变焦过程中,光阑211与第一透镜组G1一起运动。由于第一透镜组G1中各透镜之间的排布较为稀疏,而第二透镜组G2中各透镜之间的排布较为紧密,因此,将光阑211固定于第一透镜组G1可以合理利用空间,且第一透镜组G1中各透镜的径向尺寸较小,因而光阑211更容易与第一透镜组G1固定在一起。Please refer to FIG. 57 , the zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 . The diaphragm 211 is disposed on the object side of the first lens group G1 or inside the first lens group G1 or on the image side of the first lens group G1 . During the zooming process of the zoom lens 21, the diaphragm 211 moves along with the first lens group G1. In other words, the diaphragm 211 may be disposed on the object side or the image side of the first lens group G1 , or may be disposed between two adjacent lenses constituting the first lens group G1 . The diaphragm 211 is relatively fixed to the first lens group G1. During the zooming process, the diaphragm 211 moves together with the first lens group G1. Since the arrangement of the lenses in the first lens group G1 is relatively sparse, while the arrangement of the lenses in the second lens group G2 is relatively dense, therefore, the diaphragm 211 can be fixed to the first lens group G1 for reasonable use. space, and the radial size of each lens in the first lens group G1 is smaller, so the diaphragm 211 is easier to be fixed with the first lens group G1.
可选的,请参照图59,所述变焦镜头21还包括第三透镜组G3,所述第三透镜组G3固定设置于所述第二透镜组G2的像侧。所述第三透镜组G3用于补正广角端和望远端的主光线入射角度(Chief Ray Angle,CRA),CRA是Sensor的一个参数,光线需要以要求的角度入射到Sensor。对于变焦镜头21来说,需要广角端和望远端的CRA要一致。因此,第三透镜组G3用于确保变焦镜头21具有较好的成像质量。Optionally, please refer to FIG. 59 . The zoom lens 21 further includes a third lens group G3 . The third lens group G3 is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group G2 . The third lens group G3 is used to correct the chief ray incident angle (Chief Ray Angle, CRA) at the wide-angle end and telephoto end. CRA is a parameter of the Sensor, and the light needs to be incident on the Sensor at the required angle. For the zoom lens 21, the CRA at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end needs to be consistent. Therefore, the third lens group G3 is used to ensure that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging quality.
可选的,所述第一透镜组G1中的透镜总数为3-5枚,即可以为3枚或4枚或5枚。Optionally, the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 3-5, that is, 3, 4, or 5 lenses.
可选的,所述第二透镜组G2中的透镜总数为2-4枚,即可以为2枚或3枚或4枚。Optionally, the total number of lenses in the second lens group G2 is 2-4, that is, 2, 3, or 4.
可选的,当变焦镜头21包含第三透镜组G3时,所述第三透镜组G3中的透镜总数为1-2枚,即可以为1枚或2枚。Optionally, when the zoom lens 21 includes the third lens group G3, the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 1-2, that is, 1 or 2.
需说明的是,对于一枚透镜而言,第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3中的每枚透镜可 以为玻璃透镜或塑料透镜。每枚透镜可以具有正光焦度,也可以具有负光焦度。进一步的,透镜靠近物侧的表面称为物侧面,透镜靠近像侧的表面称为像侧面。上述三组透镜组中的每枚透镜的物侧面可以为球面、非球面等,同样,每枚透镜的像侧面可以为球面、非球面等。It should be noted that for one lens, each lens in the first lens group G1, the second lens group G2, and the third lens group G3 can be a glass lens or a plastic lens. Each lens can have positive or negative power. Furthermore, the surface of the lens close to the object side is called the object side, and the surface of the lens close to the image side is called the image side. The object side of each lens in the above three lens groups can be spherical, aspheric, etc., and similarly, the image side of each lens can be spherical, aspheric, etc.
可选的,请参照图60,所述变焦镜头21中至少有一枚透镜的临界点Q数量大于或等于2。换而言之,所述变焦镜头21包含至少一枚具有2个临界点Q或以上的透镜。其中,所述临界点Q是指透镜表面上,除与光轴X的交点外,与一垂直于光轴X的切面相切的切点。当透镜具有2个或以上的临界点Q时,透镜在径向方向上的形状变化将较为平缓,从而可以避免透镜的厚度过大,进而减小透镜在物侧指向像侧方向上的所占用空间,以使得变焦镜头21小型化,从而更有利于应用在具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上。Optionally, please refer to FIG. 60 . The number of critical points Q of at least one lens in the zoom lens 21 is greater than or equal to 2. In other words, the zoom lens 21 includes at least one lens with two critical points Q or above. The critical point Q refers to the tangent point on the lens surface that is tangent to a tangent plane perpendicular to the optical axis X, in addition to the intersection point with the optical axis X. When a lens has two or more critical points Q, the shape change of the lens in the radial direction will be relatively gentle, which can prevent the lens from being too thick and reduce the space occupied by the lens in the direction from the object side to the image side. space, so that the zoom lens 21 can be miniaturized, which is more conducive to application in electronic devices 100 that require thinness and lightness.
可选的,请参照图61,所述变焦镜头21还包括第一承载件212和第二承载件213。所述第一承载件212可以套设于所述第二承载件213的外周。第一承载件212和第二承载件213均可沿光轴X方向相对运动。所述第一透镜组G1固定于第一承载件212内。所述第一承载件212用于带动第一透镜组G1沿光轴X相对感光元件23运动。第二透镜组G2固定于第二承载件213内。第二承载件213用于带动第二透镜组G2沿光轴X相对感光元件23运动。第一承载件212可以设于电子设备100的开口K14内,第一承载件212和第二承载件213可通过开口K14伸出或缩回电子设备100。当然,第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的承载形式还可以是其它方式,图61所示的结构仅是示例性说明,不应视为对本申请的限定。Optionally, please refer to FIG. 61 . The zoom lens 21 further includes a first bearing member 212 and a second bearing member 213 . The first bearing member 212 can be sleeved on the outer periphery of the second bearing member 213 . Both the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 can move relatively along the optical axis X direction. The first lens group G1 is fixed in the first carrier 212 . The first carrying member 212 is used to drive the first lens group G1 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 . The second lens group G2 is fixed in the second bearing member 213 . The second bearing member 213 is used to drive the second lens group G2 to move along the optical axis X relative to the photosensitive element 23 . The first bearing member 212 may be disposed in the opening K14 of the electronic device 100, and the first bearing member 212 and the second bearing member 213 may extend or retract the electronic device 100 through the opening K14. Of course, the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be carried in other ways. The structure shown in FIG. 61 is only an illustration and should not be regarded as a limitation of the present application.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7。其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7. Where, fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
fw/ImgH可以但不仅限于为1.1、1.2、1.3、1.32、1.4、1.5、1.6等。例如,fw为9.2607mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者fw为9mm,ImgH为6.45mm;或者fw为8.2mm,ImgH为6.45mm。fw/ImgH can be, but is not limited to, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.32, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, etc. For example, fw is 9.2607mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 9mm and ImgH is 6.45mm; or fw is 8.2mm and ImgH is 6.45mm.
在本实施例中,将广角端焦距fw和像高ImgH的比值设定为大于1小于1.7,从而可以确保广角端的焦距在手机主摄的常用焦距范围之内。In this embodiment, the ratio of the wide-angle end focal length fw to the image height ImgH is set to be greater than 1 and less than 1.7, thereby ensuring that the wide-angle end focal length is within the common focal length range of the main camera of a mobile phone.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:-1<f1/f2<-0.5。其中,f1为所述第一透镜组G1的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组G2的焦距。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: -1<f1/f2<-0.5. Wherein, f1 is the focal length of the first lens group G1, and f2 is the focal length of the second lens group G2.
f1/f2可以但不仅限于为-0.9、-0.8、-0.82、-0.7、-0.76、-0.6、-0.61等。例如,f1为8.227mm,f2为-10.971mm;或者f1为6.674mm,f2为-8.551mm;或者f1为7.071mm,f2为-8.976mm。f1/f2 can be, but is not limited to, -0.9, -0.8, -0.82, -0.7, -0.76, -0.6, -0.61, etc. For example, f1 is 8.227mm and f2 is -10.971mm; or f1 is 6.674mm and f2 is -8.551mm; or f1 is 7.071mm and f2 is -8.976mm.
在本实施例中,将第一透镜组G1的焦距f1和第二透镜组G2的焦距f2的比值设置为大于-1小于-0.5,因而可以合理分配第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2的光焦度关系,更好地实现对焦与变焦。In this embodiment, the ratio of the focal length f1 of the first lens group G1 to the focal length f2 of the second lens group G2 is set to be greater than -1 and less than -0.5, so that the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 can be reasonably allocated The optical power relationship enables better focusing and zooming.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5。其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头21在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组G1移动的距离;TTLt为所述变焦镜头21处于所述望远端时的光学总长。Δd/TTLt可以但不仅限于为0.16、0.17、0.19、0.2、0.21、0.26、0.3、0.32、0.4、0.45等。例如,Δd为3.640mm,TTLt为16.518mm;或者Δd为5.347mm,TTLt为17.873mm;或者Δd为3.648mm,TTLt为15.268mm。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5. Wherein, Δd is the distance that the first lens group G1 moves during the zooming process of the zoom lens 21 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end; TTLt is the distance when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end. total optical length. Δd/TTLt may be, but is not limited to, 0.16, 0.17, 0.19, 0.2, 0.21, 0.26, 0.3, 0.32, 0.4, 0.45, etc. For example, Δd is 3.640mm and TTLt is 16.518mm; or Δd is 5.347mm and TTLt is 17.873mm; or Δd is 3.648mm and TTLt is 15.268mm.
在本实施例中,合理的将第一透镜组G1从广角端至望远端的移动距离与变焦镜头21的最大光学总长的比值设置在0.15和0.5之间,使得能够以较小的镜组间隔变化量实现较大的变倍比,从而有利于压缩变焦镜头21的总长。In this embodiment, the ratio of the moving distance of the first lens group G1 from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end and the maximum total optical length of the zoom lens 21 is reasonably set between 0.15 and 0.5, so that a smaller lens group can be used. The interval variation achieves a larger zoom ratio, which is beneficial to compressing the total length of the zoom lens 21 .
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt)。其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头21处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头21处于望远端时的半画角。其中,所述半画角是指视场角(Field of Vision,FOV)的一半。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt). Wherein, hFOVw is the half-viewing angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end, and hFOVt is the half-viewing angle when the zoom lens 21 is at the telephoto end. Wherein, the half picture angle refers to half of the field of view (Field of Vision, FOV).
tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt)可以但不仅限于为1.6、1.71、1.8、1.9、2.0、2.1、2.2、2.25等。例如,hFOVw为42.005°,hFOVt为23.218°;或者hFOVw为34.821°,hFOVt为22.486°;或者hFOVw为41.672°,hFOVt为25.120°。tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt) may be, but is not limited to, 1.6, 1.71, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.25, etc. For example, hFOVw is 42.005° and hFOVt is 23.218°; or hFOVw is 34.821° and hFOVt is 22.486°; or hFOVw is 41.672° and hFOVt is 25.120°.
在本实施例中,通过将tan(hFOVw)与tan(hFOVt)的比值设置为大于1.5,从而使得变焦镜头21的变焦倍率在1.5倍以上。In this embodiment, by setting the ratio of tan(hFOVw) to tan(hFOVt) to be greater than 1.5, the zoom magnification of the zoom lens 21 is greater than 1.5 times.
可选的,所述变焦镜头21满足关系式:fw/ENPw<2.4。其中,fw为所述广角端的焦距,ENPw为所述变焦镜头21处于所述广角端时的入射瞳直径。Optionally, the zoom lens 21 satisfies the relationship: fw/ENPw<2.4. Wherein, fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end, and ENPw is the entrance pupil diameter when the zoom lens 21 is at the wide-angle end.
fw/ENPw可以但不仅限于为2.3、2.26、2.2、2.18、2.1、2.0、1.98、1.9、1.8等。例如,fw为9.2607mm,ENPw为4.677mm;或者fw为9mm,ENPw为4.091mm;或者fw为8.2mm,ENPw为4.141mm。fw/ENPw can be but is not limited to 2.3, 2.26, 2.2, 2.18, 2.1, 2.0, 1.98, 1.9, 1.8, etc. For example, fw is 9.2607mm, ENPw is 4.677mm; or fw is 9mm, ENPw is 4.091mm; or fw is 8.2mm, ENPw is 4.141mm.
在本实施例中,通过将广角端焦距和广角端的入射瞳直径的比值设定为小于2.4,使得广角端的光圈在2.4以下,从而可以提高镜头的亮度和虚化效果。其中,镜头的亮度提高,进入镜头的光线量就越多,也即代表夜晚也能清晰成像。In this embodiment, by setting the ratio of the focal length of the wide-angle end to the entrance pupil diameter of the wide-angle end to less than 2.4, the aperture of the wide-angle end is less than 2.4, thereby improving the brightness and blur effect of the lens. Among them, as the brightness of the lens increases, more light enters the lens, which means that clear images can be captured at night.
可选的,对于以上任意实施例中,所述变焦镜头21中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。透镜总数N可以为5、或6、或7、或8、或9、或10。例如,第一透镜组G1中的透镜总数为4枚,第二透镜L2中的透镜总数为3枚,第三透镜组G3中的透镜总数为0枚。或者,第一透镜组G1中的透镜总数为4枚,第二透镜L2中的透镜总数为3枚,第三透镜组G3中的透镜总数为1枚。Optionally, for any of the above embodiments, the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens 21 satisfies: 5≤N≤10. The total number of lenses N may be 5, or 6, or 7, or 8, or 9, or 10. For example, the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is 4, the total number of lenses in the second lens L2 is 3, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is 0. Alternatively, the total number of lenses in the first lens group G1 is four, the total number of lenses in the second lens L2 is three, and the total number of lenses in the third lens group G3 is one.
当变焦透镜中的透镜数目越多时,所述变焦镜头21的成像效果越好。当变焦透镜中的透镜数目越少 时,成本更低,最小光学总长cTTL更小。当透镜总数N小于5时,成像品质不能保证;当透镜总数N大于10时,变焦镜头21的光学总长太大,不适于应用在具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上。本申请实施例兼顾成像品质和光学总长而将透镜总数选取为5至10之间,从而可以确保变焦镜头21具有较好成像效果的同时又能实现变焦镜头21小型化的有益效果。When the number of lenses in the zoom lens is greater, the imaging effect of the zoom lens 21 is better. When the number of lenses in a zoom lens is smaller, the cost is lower and the minimum total optical length cTTL is smaller. When the total number of lenses N is less than 5, the imaging quality cannot be guaranteed; when the total number of lenses N is greater than 10, the total optical length of the zoom lens 21 is too large and is not suitable for application in the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness. In the embodiment of the present application, the total number of lenses is selected between 5 and 10 by taking both imaging quality and total optical length into consideration, thereby ensuring that the zoom lens 21 has better imaging effects and at the same time achieving the beneficial effect of miniaturization of the zoom lens 21 .
应用本申请提供的变焦镜头21,变焦镜头21的最大光学总长TTLt可控制在26mm以下(比如20mm)。变焦镜头21最小光学总长cTTL可控制在11mm以下(比如10mm)。广角端的视场角可实现在90度以下。望远端的视场角可实现小于50度。因此,本申请提供的变焦镜头21不仅可以很好的适应于具有轻薄化要求的电子设备100上,同时又兼备很好的拍摄性能。Using the zoom lens 21 provided by this application, the maximum total optical length TTLt of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 26 mm (for example, 20 mm). The minimum total optical length cTTL of the zoom lens 21 can be controlled below 11 mm (for example, 10 mm). The field of view at the wide-angle end can be achieved below 90 degrees. The field of view angle at the telephoto end can be less than 50 degrees. Therefore, the zoom lens 21 provided by the present application can not only be well adapted to the electronic device 100 that requires thinness and lightness, but also has good shooting performance.
以下通过三组具体的实施例对本申请提供的变焦镜头21做更进一步的说明。在以下各实施例中,各非球面计算公式为:The zoom lens 21 provided by this application will be further described below through three sets of specific embodiments. In the following embodiments, the calculation formula of each aspheric surface is:
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000066
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000066
其中,x为非球面沿光轴方向在高度为h的位置时,距非球面顶点的距离矢高;c为非球面的近轴曲率,c=1/R(即,近轴曲率c为以下表格中曲率半径R的倒数);k为圆锥系数(请参见表格);Ai为第i阶非球面系数。Among them, x is the distance sagittal height from the aspherical surface vertex when the aspherical surface is at a height h along the optical axis; c is the paraxial curvature of the aspherical surface, c=1/R (that is, the paraxial curvature c is the following table The reciprocal of the radius of curvature R); k is the cone coefficient (see table); Ai is the i-th order aspheric coefficient.
实施例1Example 1
请参照图57和图58,其中,图58(a)为图57所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图58(b)为图57所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2。所述第一透镜组G1为具有正光焦度的透镜组,所述第二透镜组G2为具有负光焦度的透镜组。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4之间。Please refer to FIGS. 57 and 58 , wherein FIG. 58(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 58(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 57 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power. Among them, the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
关于实施例1提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表31至表35。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1, please refer to Table 31 to Table 35.
表31为实施例1中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表31中,表面序号1-19为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 31 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 1, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 31, surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
需说明的是,间隔d代表当前表面与后一表面沿光轴的间隔距离为d。例如,表31中的表面2与表面3的间隔为0.465,表面3与表面4的间隔为0.729。后文涉及到间隔d的地方请参考此处。It should be noted that the interval d represents the distance d between the current surface and the subsequent surface along the optical axis. For example, the distance between surface 2 and surface 3 in Table 31 is 0.465, and the distance between surface 3 and surface 4 is 0.729. Please refer to here for information about interval d later.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000067
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000068
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000068
表32为实施例1中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 32 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 1, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000069
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000069
表33为实施例1中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表33包括表33a、表33b、表33c、表33d。Table 33 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 1. Table 33 includes Table 33a, Table 33b, Table 33c, and Table 33d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000070
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000070
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000072
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000072
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000073
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000073
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000074
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000074
表34为实施例1中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 34 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 1.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000075
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000075
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000076
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000076
表35为实施例1中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 35 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 1. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000077
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000077
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第四透镜L4的像侧面和第五透镜L5的物侧面在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和滤光片22沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第七透镜L7的像侧面至滤光片22的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 along the optical axis separation distance), and the separation d2 between the second lens group G2 and the filter 22 along the optical axis X (that is, the separation distance along the optical axis X from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the filter 22) To realize the switching between 21 groups of zoom lenses between telephoto end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图62至图64,图62至图64示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 62 to 64 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图62为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 62 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 1 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图63为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 63 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图64为实施例1中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 64 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图65至图67,图65至图67示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 65 to 67 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图65为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 65 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 1 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图66为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 66 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图67为实施例1中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 67 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 1 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图62至图67可以看出,实施例1所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 62 to 67 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 1 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例2Example 2
请参照图68和图69,其中,图69(a)为图68所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图69(b)为图68所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2、第三透镜组G3。所述第一透镜组G1为具有正光焦度的透镜组,所述第二透镜组G2为具有负光焦度的透镜组。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7。第三透镜组G3包括第八透镜L8。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4之间。Please refer to FIGS. 68 and 69 , wherein FIG. 69(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 69(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 68 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1, a second lens group G2, and a third lens group G3 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power. Among them, the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side. The third lens group G3 includes an eighth lens L8. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
关于实施例2提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表36至表40。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2, please refer to Table 36 to Table 40.
表36为实施例2中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表36中,表面序号1-21为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 36 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 2, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 36, surface numbers 1-21 are along the direction from the object side to the image side, marking the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter and imaging surface in order. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000078
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000078
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000079
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000079
表37为实施例2中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 37 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Example 2, that is, the corresponding variable interval d when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000080
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000080
表38为实施例2中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表38包括表38a、表38b、表38c、表38d。Table 38 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 2. Table 38 includes Table 38a, Table 38b, Table 38c, and Table 38d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000081
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000081
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000082
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000082
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000084
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000084
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000085
表39为实施例2中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 39 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 2.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000086
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000086
表40为实施例2中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 40 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 2. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000087
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000087
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第四透镜L4的像侧面和第五透镜L5的物侧面在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和第三透镜组G3沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第七透镜L7的像侧面至第八透镜L8的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 along the optical axis separation distance), and the separation d2 of the second lens group G2 and the third lens group G3 along the optical axis X (that is, the separation distance along the optical axis X from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the eighth lens L8 ) to realize the switching between the telephoto end, wide-angle end and contracted state of the 21 groups of zoom lenses.
请参照图70至图72,图70至图72示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 70 to 72 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图70为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 70 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图71为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 71 is the axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图72为实施例2中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 72 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图73至图75,图73至图75示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 73 to 75 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图73为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 73 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 2 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图74为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm, 实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 74 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end. In the figure, the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图75为实施例2中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 75 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 2 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图70至图75可以看出,实施例2所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 70 to 75 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 2 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
实施例3Example 3
请参照图76和图77,其中,图77(a)为图76所示的变焦镜头处于广角端的示意图。图77(b)为图76所示的变焦镜头处于望远端的示意图。本实施例提供的变焦镜头21包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组G1、第二透镜组G2。所述第一透镜组G1为具有正光焦度的透镜组,所述第二透镜组G2为具有负光焦度的透镜组。其中,第一透镜组G1包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜L1、第二透镜L2、第三透镜L3、第四透镜L4。第二透镜组G2包括沿物侧到像侧排列的第五透镜L5、第六透镜L6、第七透镜L7。变焦镜头21还包括光阑211,所述光阑211设置于第三透镜L3和第四透镜L4之间。Please refer to FIG. 76 and FIG. 77 , wherein FIG. 77(a) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the wide-angle end. FIG. 77(b) is a schematic diagram of the zoom lens shown in FIG. 76 at the telephoto end. The zoom lens 21 provided in this embodiment includes: a first lens group G1 and a second lens group G2 arranged along the object side to the image side. The first lens group G1 is a lens group with positive refractive power, and the second lens group G2 is a lens group with negative refractive power. Among them, the first lens group G1 includes a first lens L1, a second lens L2, a third lens L3, and a fourth lens L4 arranged along the object side to the image side. The second lens group G2 includes a fifth lens L5, a sixth lens L6, and a seventh lens L7 arranged from the object side to the image side. The zoom lens 21 further includes an aperture 211 disposed between the third lens L3 and the fourth lens L4.
关于实施例3提供的变焦镜头的具体数据请参照表41至表45。For specific data on the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3, please refer to Table 41 to Table 45.
表41为实施例3中变焦镜头的各透镜、光阑、滤光片的相关参数,包括曲率半径R、间隔d、折射率Nd、阿贝系数Vd。其中,曲率半径R、间隔d的单位均为毫米(mm)。在表41中,表面序号1-19为沿物侧至像侧方向,依次标记被拍摄物、各透镜、光阑、滤光片的表面及成像面。其中,被拍摄物记为OBJ,光阑记为STO,成像面记为IMA。Table 41 shows the relevant parameters of each lens, aperture, and filter of the zoom lens in Embodiment 3, including the radius of curvature R, the interval d, the refractive index Nd, and the Abbe coefficient Vd. Among them, the units of the radius of curvature R and the interval d are both millimeters (mm). In Table 41, surface numbers 1-19 mark the surface of the subject, each lens, diaphragm, filter, and imaging surface in sequence along the direction from the object side to the image side. Among them, the photographed object is marked as OBJ, the aperture is marked as STO, and the imaging surface is marked as IMA.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000088
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000088
表42为实施例3中变焦镜头从广角端变化至望远端时的可变间隔d,即变焦镜头处于广角端和望远端时所对应的可变间隔d。Table 42 shows the variable interval d when the zoom lens changes from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end in Embodiment 3, that is, the variable interval d corresponding to when the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000089
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000089
表43为实施例3中各透镜的非球面镜面的k值和非球面系数,表43包括表43a、表43b、表43c、表 43d。Table 43 shows the k value and aspheric coefficient of the aspheric mirror surface of each lens in Example 3. Table 43 includes Table 43a, Table 43b, Table 43c, and Table 43d.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000090
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000092
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000092
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000093
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000093
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000094
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000094
表44为实施例3中变焦镜头的总体参数数据。Table 44 shows the overall parameter data of the zoom lens in Example 3.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000095
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000095
表45为实施例3中变焦镜头的条件式及对应的数据。下表中N为透镜的数量。Table 45 shows the conditional expressions and corresponding data of the zoom lens in Example 3. N in the table below is the number of lenses.
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000096
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000096
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000097
Figure PCTCN2022144201-appb-000097
在本实施例中,通过改变第一透镜组G1和第二透镜组G2沿光轴X上的间隔d1(即,第四透镜L4的像侧面和第五透镜L5的物侧面在沿光轴X的间隔距离),以及第二透镜组G2和滤光片22沿光轴X上的间隔d2(即,第七透镜L7的像侧面至滤光片22的物侧面沿光轴X的间隔距离)来实现变焦镜头21组在望远端、广角端、收缩状态之间切换。In this embodiment, by changing the distance d1 between the first lens group G1 and the second lens group G2 along the optical axis separation distance), and the separation d2 between the second lens group G2 and the filter 22 along the optical axis X (that is, the separation distance along the optical axis X from the image side of the seventh lens L7 to the object side of the filter 22) To realize the switching between 21 groups of zoom lenses between telephoto end, wide-angle end and contracted state.
请参照图78至图80,图78至图80示出了变焦镜头的广角端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 78 to 80 , which show relevant graphs at the wide-angle end of the zoom lens.
图78为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 78 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the wide-angle end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图79为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 79 is an on-axis chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图80为实施例3中变焦镜头处于广角端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 80 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the wide-angle end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
请参照图81至图83,图81至图83示出了变焦镜头的望远端的相关曲线图。Please refer to FIGS. 81 to 83 , which show relevant graphs at the telephoto end of the zoom lens.
图81为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的像散曲线。图中虚线表示子午,实线表示弧矢,对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 81 is an astigmatism curve when the zoom lens in Example 3 is at the telephoto end. The dotted line in the figure represents the meridian, the solid line represents the sagittal, and the corresponding light wavelength is 587.6nm.
图82为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的轴上色差曲线。图中圆点线对应的光线波长为656.3nm,实线对应的光线波长为587.6nm,虚线对应的光线波长为486.1nm。Figure 82 is an axial chromatic aberration curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end. The wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line in the figure is 656.3nm, the wavelength of light corresponding to the solid line is 587.6nm, and the wavelength of light corresponding to the dotted line is 486.1nm.
图83为实施例3中变焦镜头处于望远端时的畸变曲线。图中对应光线波长为587.6nm。Figure 83 is a distortion curve of the zoom lens in Example 3 when it is at the telephoto end. The corresponding light wavelength in the figure is 587.6nm.
根据图78至图83可以看出,实施例3所给出的变焦镜头在广角端和望远端均具备较好的成像品质。It can be seen from Figures 78 to 83 that the zoom lens provided in Embodiment 3 has good imaging quality at both the wide-angle end and the telephoto end.
尽管上面已经示出和描述了本申请的实施例,可以理解的是,上述实施例是示例性的,不能理解为对本申请的限制,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的范围内可以对上述实施例进行变化、修改、替换和变型,这些改进和润饰也视为本申请的保护范围。Although the embodiments of the present application have been shown and described above, it can be understood that the above-mentioned embodiments are illustrative and cannot be understood as limitations of the present application. Those of ordinary skill in the art can make modifications to the above-mentioned embodiments within the scope of the present application. The embodiments are subject to changes, modifications, substitutions and modifications, and these improvements and modifications are also deemed to be within the protection scope of the present application.

Claims (34)

  1. 一种变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有负光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有正光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的广角端满足关系式:2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4;其中,TTLw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。A zoom lens, characterized in that the zoom lens includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has negative refractive power, and the second lens The zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the zoom lens at the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Zoom switching between ends; the number of critical points of at least one lens in the zoom lens is greater than or equal to 2; the wide-angle end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 2.5<TTLw/ImgH<4; where, TTLw is the zoom The total optical length of the lens when it is at the wide-angle end, and ImgH is the image height.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt,其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的光学总长。The zoom lens according to claim 1, wherein the zoom lens also has a contracted state, and when the zoom lens is in the contracted state, it satisfies the relationship: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt, where cTTL is The total optical length of the zoom lens when it is in the retracted state, TTLt is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the telephoto end.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。The zoom lens according to claim 2, wherein the contracted state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2.
  4. 如权利要求2所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头从所述收缩状态切换至所述望远端的过程中,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组沿光轴往物侧方向移动。The zoom lens according to claim 2, wherein when the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the telephoto end, the first lens group and the second lens group move along the optical axis. Move toward the object side.
  5. 如权利要求1所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴向像侧移动,所述第二透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动。The zoom lens according to claim 1, wherein during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group moves toward the image side along the optical axis, and the The second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
  6. 如权利要求1所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还包括光阑,所述光阑设置于所述第二透镜组的物侧或者所述第二透镜组的内部,所述变焦镜头在变焦过程中,所述光阑和所述第二透镜组同步移动。The zoom lens according to claim 1, wherein the zoom lens further includes an aperture, the aperture is disposed on the object side of the second lens group or inside the second lens group, and the aperture is During the zooming process of the zoom lens, the diaphragm and the second lens group move synchronously.
  7. 如权利要求1所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还包括具有负光焦度的第三透镜组,所述第三透镜组固定设置于所述第二透镜组的像侧。The zoom lens of claim 1, further comprising a third lens group with negative refractive power, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第三透镜组中的透镜总数为1-2枚。The zoom lens of claim 7, wherein the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
  9. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第一透镜组中的透镜总数为2-3枚;和/或,所述第二透镜组中的透镜总数为3-5枚。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 2-3; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 3-5 pieces.
  10. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7,其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7, where fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
  11. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:-3<f1/f2<-1.2,其中,f1为所述第一透镜组的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组的焦距。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -3<f1/f2<-1.2, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
  12. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25,其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第二透镜组移动的距离。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.05<Δd/TTLw<0.25, where Δd is the distance from the wide-angle end to the The distance that the second lens group moves during the zooming process at the telephoto end.
  13. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt),其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头处于望远端时的半画角。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw means that the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end hFOVt is the half-frame angle when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end.
  14. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式ft/ENPt<3,其中,ft为所述望远端的焦距,ENPt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的入射瞳直径。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the zoom lens satisfies the relationship ft/ENPt<3, where ft is the focal length of the telephoto end and ENPt is the zoom lens The entrance pupil diameter at the telephoto end.
  15. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第一透镜组最物侧的透镜具有负光焦度,和/或,所述第二透镜组最物侧的透镜具有正光焦度。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the object-side lens of the first lens group has negative refractive power, and/or the object-side lens of the second lens group The lens has positive power.
  16. 如权利要求1-8任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5≤N≤10.
  17. 一种变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头包括:沿物侧到像侧排列的第一透镜组、第二透镜组;所述第一透镜组具有正光焦度,所述第二透镜组具有负光焦度;所述变焦镜头具有望远端和广角端,所述第一透镜组和所述第二透镜组均可沿光轴方向移动,以在所述望远端和所述广角端之间变焦切换;所述变焦镜头中至少有一枚透镜的临界点数量大于或等于2;所述变焦镜头的望远端满足关系式:1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6;其中,TTLt为所述变焦镜头处于所述望远端时的光学总长,ImgH为像高。A zoom lens, characterized in that the zoom lens includes: a first lens group and a second lens group arranged along the object side to the image side; the first lens group has positive optical power, and the second lens group It has negative optical power; the zoom lens has a telephoto end and a wide-angle end, and both the first lens group and the second lens group can move along the optical axis direction to adjust the zoom lens at the telephoto end and the wide-angle end. Zoom switching between ends; the number of critical points of at least one lens in the zoom lens is greater than or equal to 2; the telephoto end of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.8<TTLt/ImgH<3.6; where, TTLt is the The total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the telephoto end, ImgH is the image height.
  18. 如权利要求1所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还具有收缩状态,当所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时满足关系式:cTTL<TTLw且cTTL<TTLt,其中,cTTL为所述变焦镜头处于所述收缩状态时的光学总长,TTLw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的光学总长。The zoom lens according to claim 1, wherein the zoom lens also has a contracted state, and when the zoom lens is in the contracted state, it satisfies the relationship: cTTL<TTLw and cTTL<TTLt, where cTTL is The total optical length of the zoom lens when it is in the contracted state, TTLw is the total optical length of the zoom lens when it is at the wide-angle end.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头的收缩状态满足关系式:1<cTTL/ImgH<2。The zoom lens according to claim 18, wherein the contracted state of the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<cTTL/ImgH<2.
  20. 如权利要求18所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头从所述收缩状态切换至所述广角端的过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴往物侧方向移动。The zoom lens of claim 18, wherein when the zoom lens switches from the retracted state to the wide-angle end, the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
  21. 如权利要求17所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动,所述第二透镜组沿光轴向物侧移动。The zoom lens according to claim 17, wherein during the zooming process of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the first lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis, and the The second lens group moves toward the object side along the optical axis.
  22. 如权利要求17所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还包括光阑,所述光阑设置于所述第 一透镜组的物侧或者所述第一透镜组的内部或者所述第一透镜组的像侧,所述变焦镜头在变焦过程中,所述光阑跟随所述第一透镜组移动。The zoom lens according to claim 17, characterized in that the zoom lens further includes an aperture, the aperture is disposed on the object side of the first lens group or inside the first lens group or the On the image side of the first lens group, during the zooming process of the zoom lens, the diaphragm moves with the first lens group.
  23. 如权利要求17所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头还包括第三透镜组,所述第三透镜组固定设置于所述第二透镜组的像侧。The zoom lens according to claim 17, wherein the zoom lens further includes a third lens group, and the third lens group is fixedly disposed on the image side of the second lens group.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第三透镜组中的透镜总数为1-2枚。The zoom lens of claim 23, wherein the total number of lenses in the third lens group is 1-2.
  25. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第一透镜组中的透镜总数为3-5枚;和/或,所述第二透镜组中的透镜总数为2-4枚。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, wherein the total number of lenses in the first lens group is 3-5; and/or the total number of lenses in the second lens group is 2-4 pieces.
  26. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1<fw/ImgH<1.7,其中,fw为所述广角端焦距。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, wherein the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1<fw/ImgH<1.7, where fw is the wide-angle end focal length.
  27. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:-1<f1/f2<-0.5,其中,f1为所述第一透镜组的焦距,f2为所述第二透镜组的焦距。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: -1<f1/f2<-0.5, where f1 is the focal length of the first lens group, f2 is the focal length of the second lens group.
  28. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5,其中,Δd为所述变焦镜头在从所述广角端到所述望远端的变焦过程中,所述第一透镜组移动的距离。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 0.15<Δd/TTLt<0.5, where Δd is the position of the zoom lens from the wide-angle end to The distance that the first lens group moves during the zooming process at the telephoto end.
  29. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt),其中,hFOVw为所述变焦镜头处于广角端时的半画角,hFOVt为所述变焦镜头处于望远端时的半画角。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: 1.5<tan(hFOVw)/tan(hFOVt), where hFOVw means that the zoom lens is at the wide-angle end hFOVt is the half-frame angle when the zoom lens is at the telephoto end.
  30. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头满足关系式:fw/ENPw<2.4,其中,fw为所述广角端的焦距,ENPw为所述变焦镜头处于所述广角端时的入射瞳直径。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, characterized in that the zoom lens satisfies the relationship: fw/ENPw<2.4, where fw is the focal length of the wide-angle end and ENPw is the focal length of the zoom lens at the wide-angle end. The entrance pupil diameter at the wide-angle end.
  31. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述第一透镜组最像侧的透镜具有正光焦度。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, wherein the lens on the most image side of the first lens group has positive refractive power.
  32. 如权利要求17-24任意一项所述的变焦镜头,其特征在于,所述变焦镜头中的透镜总数N满足:5≤N≤10。The zoom lens according to any one of claims 17 to 24, wherein the total number of lenses N in the zoom lens satisfies: 5≤N≤10.
  33. 一种摄像头模组,其特征在于,所述摄像头模组包括感光元件及如权利要求1-32任意一项所述的变焦镜头,所述变焦镜头可沿光轴方向相对所述感光元件运动。A camera module, characterized in that the camera module includes a photosensitive element and a zoom lens according to any one of claims 1 to 32, and the zoom lens can move relative to the photosensitive element along the optical axis direction.
  34. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括设备本体及如权利要求33所述的摄像头模组,所述设备本体具有开口,所述摄像头模组对应所述开口设置在所述设备本体内,所述摄像头模组的变焦镜头至少部分可通过所述开口伸出或缩回所述设备本体。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes a device body and a camera module as claimed in claim 33, the device body has an opening, and the camera module is disposed on the device body corresponding to the opening. Inside, at least part of the zoom lens of the camera module can extend or retract the device body through the opening.
PCT/CN2022/144201 2022-04-25 2022-12-30 Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device WO2023207204A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210441771.9A CN116990946A (en) 2022-04-25 2022-04-25 Zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment
CN202210439560.1 2022-04-25
CN202210441771.9 2022-04-25
CN202210439560.1A CN116990945A (en) 2022-04-25 2022-04-25 Zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023207204A1 true WO2023207204A1 (en) 2023-11-02

Family

ID=88517175

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/144201 WO2023207204A1 (en) 2022-04-25 2022-12-30 Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023207204A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120120503A1 (en) * 2010-11-17 2012-05-17 Hoya Corporation Zoom lens system and electronic imaging apparatus using
CN103221868A (en) * 2010-11-18 2013-07-24 富士胶片株式会社 Zoom lens
CN112230404A (en) * 2020-10-28 2021-01-15 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Optical zoom lens, camera module and mobile terminal
CN113406780A (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-17 株式会社腾龙 Zoom lens and imaging device
CN113671677A (en) * 2021-08-13 2021-11-19 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 Zoom lens group

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120120503A1 (en) * 2010-11-17 2012-05-17 Hoya Corporation Zoom lens system and electronic imaging apparatus using
CN103221868A (en) * 2010-11-18 2013-07-24 富士胶片株式会社 Zoom lens
CN113406780A (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-17 株式会社腾龙 Zoom lens and imaging device
CN112230404A (en) * 2020-10-28 2021-01-15 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Optical zoom lens, camera module and mobile terminal
CN113671677A (en) * 2021-08-13 2021-11-19 浙江舜宇光学有限公司 Zoom lens group

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7864443B2 (en) Zoom lens, imaging apparatus, and personal data assistant
KR101617794B1 (en) Compact Lens Optical System and Digital Camera Module Comprising the Same
US9195036B2 (en) Zoom lens, camera, and portable information device
TWI424190B (en) Imaging lens system
JP2014059466A (en) Imaging lens, image capturing device, and information device
US20200333561A1 (en) Telephoto lens and mobile terminal
CN107533214A (en) Zoom lens and the camera device with the zoom lens
CN111965789A (en) Optical lens, imaging device and terminal
CN112034595A (en) Optical system, camera module and electronic equipment
US10948683B2 (en) Imaging lens, camera, and portable information terminal device
CN113341537B (en) Photographing optical system, camera device, and stereoscopic camera device
JP2016218486A (en) Imaging lens, image capturing device, and information device
JP2020086323A (en) Zoom lens and image capturing device
US20060245075A1 (en) Compact zoom lens
CN115437128B (en) Optical lens, camera module and electronic equipment
CN114460723B (en) Optical system, camera module and electronic equipment
JP4974103B2 (en) Zoom lens
WO2023207204A1 (en) Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device
CN213023741U (en) Optical lens, camera device and terminal
CN114185161A (en) Optical system, lens module and electronic equipment
CN114415353A (en) Optical system, camera module and electronic equipment
WO2024011358A1 (en) Zoom lens, camera module and electronic device
WO2023179607A1 (en) Optical lens, camera module and electronic device
CN116990945A (en) Zoom lens, camera module and electronic equipment
JP2020086324A (en) Zoom lens and image capturing device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22940010

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1